https://www -manuals.com/pdf/marantz-sr6010-7-2-channel-network-a-v-receiver-sr6010-b-h-photo-364940-user-manual

TELECONVERTERS SONY User manual | PDF-MANUALS.com

Marantz Black 7.2 Channel Full 4K Ultra HD Network A/V Receiver With Wi-Fi And Bluetooth Manual

Marantz SR6010 SR6010 699927240851

PDF preview unavailable. Download the PDF instead.

SR6010 manual
Contents .

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

AV Surround Receiver
SR6010

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

1

Remote

Owner's Manual
Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Accessories Inserting the batteries Operating range of the remote control unit
Features High quality sound High performance Easy operation
Part names and functions Front panel Display Rear panel Remote control unit
Connections
Connecting speakers Speaker installation Speaker connection Speaker configuration and "Amp Assign" settings
Connecting a TV Connection 1 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and compatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) Connection 2 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and incompatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) Connection 3 : TV equipped without an HDMI connector

7 Connecting a playback device

65

8

Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)

66

8

Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player

67

9

Connecting a video camcorder or game console

68

9

Connecting a turntable

69

10

Connecting a device with a multi-channel output connector

70

13 Connecting an iPod or USB memory device to the USB port

71

14 Connecting an FM/AM antenna

73

14 Connecting to a home network (LAN)

75

18

Wired LAN

75

20

Wireless LAN

76

24 Connecting an external control device

77

REMOTE CONTROL jacks

77

DC OUT jack

78

28 Connecting the power cord

79

28 36

Playback

40 Basic operation

81

61

Turning the power on

81

Selecting the input source

81

62

Adjusting the volume

82

63

Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting)

82

64

Playback a DVD player/Blu-ray Disc player

82

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

2

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Playing an iPod

83 Listening to Internet Radio

104

Listening to music on an iPod

84

Listening to Internet Radio

105

iPod Browse Mode settings

85

Playing the last played Internet Radio station

106

Performing repeat playback

87

Using vTuner to add Internet Radio stations to favorites

107

Performing random playback

87 Playing back files stored on a PC and NAS

108

Playing a USB memory device

88

Applying media sharing settings

109

Playing files stored on USB memory devices

89

Playing back files stored on a PC and NAS

110

Listening to music on a Bluetooth device

91 Listening to Pandora®

112

Playing music from Bluetooth device

92

Listening to Pandora®

113

Pairing with other Bluetooth devices

94

Creating a new station

115

Reconnecting to this unit from a Bluetooth device

95

Listening to an existing station

116

Listening to FM/AM broadcasts

96

Listening to created radio stations at random

116

Listening to FM/AM broadcasts

97

Giving feedback and managing stations

117

Tuning in by entering the frequency (Direct Tune)

98

Sign Out

118

Changing the tune mode (Tune Mode)

99 Listening to SiriusXM Internet Radio

119

Tuning in to stations and presetting them automatically (Auto

Listening to SiriusXM Internet Radio

120

Preset Memory)

99

Sign Out

121

Presetting the current broadcast station (Preset Memory)

100

Listening to preset stations

100

Specify a name for the preset broadcast station (Preset Name)

101

Skipping preset broadcast stations (Preset Skip)

102

Cancelling Preset Skip

103

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

3

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

AirPlay function

122 Selecting a sound mode

137

Playing songs from your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad

123

Selecting a sound mode

138

Playing iTunes music with this unit

123

Direct playback

139

Selecting multiple speakers (devices)

124

Pure Direct playback

139

Perform iTunes playback operations with the remote control unit

Auto surround playback

140

of this unit

124 HDMI control function

150

Spotify Connect function

125

Setting procedure

150

Playing Spotify music with this unit

125 Smart Menu function

151

Convenience functions

126 Sleep timer function

153

Performing repeat playback

127

Using the sleep timer

154

Performing random playback

127 Smart select function

155

Registering to Favorites

128

Calling up the settings

156

Playing back content added to the "Save to Favorites"

128

Changing the settings

157

Deleting content added to favorites

129 Web control function

158

Searching content with keywords (Text Search)

129

Controlling the unit from a web control

158

Playing back music and a favorite picture at the same time (Slideshow)

130 Panel lock function

160

Setting the Slideshow Interval

131

Disabling all key button operations

160

Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source

Disabling all button operations except VOLUME

160

(Channel Level Adjust)

132

Canceling the Panel lock function

161

Adjusting the tone (Tone)

133 Remote lock function

162

Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video

Disabling the sensor function of the remote control unit

162

Select)

134

Enabling the remote sensor function

162

Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment (Picture

Mode)

135

Playback in ZONE2 (Separate room) Connecting ZONE2

163 163

Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)

136

Playback in ZONE2

165

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

4

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Settings
Menu map Menu operations
Inputting characters Using the keyboard screen
Audio Dialog Level Adjust Subwoofer Level Adjust Surround Parameter M-DAX Audio Delay Volume Audyssey® Graphic EQ
Video Picture Adjust HDMI Setup Output Settings On Screen Display TV Format

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Inputs

200

Input Assign

200

167

Source Rename

202

170

Hide Sources

203

171

Source Level

203

172

Input Select

204

173 Speakers

205

173 Audyssey® Setup

205

173

Procedure for speaker settings (Audyssey® Setup)

207

174

Error messages

213

177

Retrieving Audyssey® Setup settings

215

178 Manual Setup

216

178

Amp Assign

216

180

Speaker Config.

222

184

Distances

226

186

Levels

228

186

Crossovers

229

188

Bass

230

194

Front Speaker

231

198

199

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

5

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Network Information Connection Wi-Fi Setup Settings Network Control Friendly Name Diagnostics Maintenance Mode
General Language ECO ZONE2 Setup Zone Rename Smart Select Names Trigger Out Front Display Firmware Information Usage Data Setup Lock
Limiting the operating zone with the remote control

232 Tips

232

232

Tips

256

233

Troubleshooting

258

236 Resetting factory settings

276

238 Appendix
238

239 About HDMI

277

240 Video conversion function

280

241 Playing back a USB memory devices

282

241 Playing back a Bluetooth device

283

241 Playing back a file saved on a PC or NAS

284

244 Playing back Internet Radio

285

246 Personal memory plus function

285

247 Last function memory

285

247 Sound modes and channel output

286

248 Sound modes and surround parameters

288

249 Types of input signals, and corresponding sound modes

291

251 Explanation of terms

294

252 Trademark information

303

253 Specifications

305

254 Index

311

License

314

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

6

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Thank you for purchasing this Marantz product. To ensure proper operation, please read this owner's manual carefully before using the product. After reading this manual, be sure to keep it for future reference.
Accessories
Check that the following parts are supplied with the product.
.

Tips

Appendix

Quick Start Guide

Safety Instructions

Notes on radio

Warranty (for USA/for CANADA)

Cable labels

Power cord

FM indoor antenna

AM loop antenna

Sound calibration microphone (ACM1HB)

Sound calibration microphone stand

Remote control unit (RC025SR)

R03/AAA batteries

External antennas for Bluetooth/wireless connectivity

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

7

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Inserting the batteries
1 Remove the rear lid in the direction of the arrow and remove it.

.
2 Insert two batteries correctly into the battery compartment as indicated. R03/AAA batteries
.
3 Put the rear cover back on.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

NOTE 0 To prevent damage or leakage of battery fluid:
0 Do not use a new battery together with an old one. 0 Do not use two different types of batteries. 0 Remove the batteries from the remote control unit if it will not be in use for long periods. 0 If the battery fluid should leak, carefully wipe the fluid off the inside of the battery compartment and insert new batteries.
Operating range of the remote control unit
Point the remote control unit at the remote sensor when operating it.

Approx. 23 ft/7 m
.

30° 30°

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

8

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Features

High quality sound
0 With discrete circuit technology, the power amplifier provides identical quality for all 7-channels (150 Watts x 7-channels) For optimum realism and stunning dynamic range, the power amplifier section features discrete power devices (not integrated circuitry). By using high current, high power discrete power devices, the amplifier is able to easily drive high quality speakers.
0 Current feedback amplifier This unit uses a high-speed current feedback amplifier circuit for its preamplifier so that signals from a Blu-ray Disc player and other equipment that support high-definition audio formats can be amplified with high fidelity. The high-speed current feedback amplifier also reproduces a natural sound space.
0 Dolby Atmos (v p. 295) This unit is equipped with a decoder that supports Dolby Atmos audio format. The placement or movement of sound is accurately reproduced by the addition of overhead speakers, enabling you to experience an incredibly natural and realistic surround sound field.
0 DTS:X This unit is equipped with the DTS:X decoder technology. DTS:X brings the home theater experience to new heights with its immersive object based audio technology which removes the bounds of channels. The flexibility of objects allows for sound to be scaled large or small and moved around the room with greater accuracy than ever before leading to a richer immersive audio experience.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

0 Audyssey DSX® (v p. 183)
This unit is equipped with Audyssey DSX® processor. By connecting front height speakers to this unit and playing back with Audyssey DSX® processing you can experience a more vertically expansive front soundstage. By connecting two front wide speakers, you can experience a wider and more expanded front soundstage. 0 Audyssey LFCTM (Low Frequency Containment) (v p. 182)
Audyssey LFCTM solves the problem of low frequency sounds disturbing people in neighboring rooms or apartments. Audyssey LFCTM dynamically monitors the audio content and removes the low frequencies that pass through walls, floors and ceilings. It then applies psychoacoustic processing to restore the perception of low bass for listeners in the room. The result is great sound that no longer disturbs the neighbors.
0 Discrete subwoofers and Audyssey Sub EQ HTTM (v p. 206)
The unit has two subwoofer output capability and can adjust the level and delay for each subwoofer individually. Audyssey Sub EQ HTTM makes the integration seamless by first compensating for any level and delay differences between the two subwoofers and then applying Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 to both subwoofers together for improved deep bass response and detail.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

9

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

High performance
0 4K 60Hz input/output supported

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

0 Digital video processor upscales analog video signals (SD resolution) to HD (720p/1080p) and 4K (v p. 196)

Up to 1080p

4K Up scaling

.
When 4K Ultra HD (High Definition) is used, an input/output speed of 60 frames per second (60p) is achieved for video signals. When connected to 4K Ultra HD and 60p video signal input compatible TV, you can enjoy the sense of realism only available from high-definition images, even when viewing fast-moving video. This unit also supports image processing for 4K 60p, 4:4:4 and 24-bit videos. By processing the video at the original resolution, this unit lets you enjoy flawless, high-definition picture quality.
0 HDCP 2.2 This unit is compatible with HDCP 2.2 copyright protection standard.

.
This unit is equipped with a 4K video upscaling function that allows analog video or SD (Standard Definition) video to be output via HDMI at 4K (3840 × 2160 pixels) resolution. This function enables the device to be connected to a TV using a single HDMI cable, and produces high definition images for any video source. 0 Equipped with HDMI ZONE2 output (v p. 163)
The ZONE2 multi-room output includes an HDMI output that lets you enjoy a different A/V source in that room, with another program playing in the main room.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

10

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

0 HDMI connections enable connection to various digital AV devices (8 inputs, 2 outputs)
82
In Out

Settings

Tips

Appendix

0 The device is equipped with a AirPlay® function in addition to network functions such as Internet radio etc. (v p. 122)

.
For connection to a broad range of digital sources, this unit features 8 HDMI inputs, including 1 on the front panel that lets you quickly and conveniently connect a camcorder, game console or other HDMIequipped device. There are dual HDMI outputs for the main room, and a third HDMI output for another room.

.
You can enjoy a wide variety of content, including listening to Internet Radio, playing audio files stored on your PC, and displaying photographs stored on your PC on our television. This unit also supports Apple AirPlay which lets you stream your music library from an iPhone®, iPad®, iPod touch® or iTunes®.
0 Playback of DSD and FLAC files via USB and networks This unit supports the playback of high resolution audio formats such as DSD (2.8 MHz) and FLAC 192 kHz files. It provides high quality playback of high resolution files.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

11

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

0 Wireless connection with Bluetooth devices can be carried out easily (v p. 91)

Settings

Tips

0 Multi-Room audio (v p. 136) GMAIN ZONEH

Appendix GZONE2H

.
You can enjoy music simply by connecting wirelessly with your smartphone, tablet, PC, etc.
0 Compatible with the "Marantz 2015 AVR Remote"z for performing basic operations of the unit with an iPad, iPhone or AndroidTM devices (Google, Amazon Kindle Fire)
"Marantz 2015 AVR Remote" is application software that allows you to perform basic operations with an iPad, iPhone, Android smartphone or Android tablet such as turning the unit ON/OFF, controlling the volume, and switching the source. z Download the appropriate "Marantz 2015 AVR Remote" for your iOS or Android
devices. This unit needs to be connected to the same LAN or Wi-Fi (wireless LAN) network that the iPhone or iPod touch is connected to.

.
You can select and play back the respective inputs in MAIN ZONE and ZONE2. In addition, when the All Zone Stereo function is used, the music being played back in MAIN ZONE can be enjoyed in all the zones at the same time. This is useful when you want to let the BGM propagate throughout the whole house.
0 Energy-saving design This unit is equipped with an ECO Mode function that allows you to enjoy music and movies while reducing the power consumption during use, and also an auto-standby function that automatically turns off the power supply when the unit is not in use. This helps reduce unnecessary power use.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

12

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Easy operation
0 "Setup Assistant" provides easy-to-follow setup instructions First select the language when prompted. Then simply follow the instructions displayed on the TV screen to set up the speakers, network, etc.
0 Easy to use Graphical User Interface This unit is equipped with a Graphical User Interface for improved operability.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

13

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Part names and functions

Front panel

qw

e

Settings

Tips

r

t

Appendix y

.
Front panel

Display

u

Rear panel

14

Remote

Index

Contents qw e

Connections rt

Playback y

u
.
A Power operation button (X) Used to turn the power of the MAIN ZONE (room where this unit is located) on/off (standby). (v p. 81)
B Power indicator This is lit as follows according to the power status: 0 Off: Power on 0 Red: Normal standby 0 Orange: 0 When "HDMI Control" is set to "On" (v p. 189) 0 When "HDMI Pass Through" is set to "On" (v p. 190) 0 When "Network Control" is set to "Always On" (v p. 238)

Settings

Tips

Appendix

C INPUT SELECTOR knob This selects the input source. (v p. 81)
D Display This displays various pieces of information. (v p. 18)
E Remote control sensor This receives signals from the remote control unit. (v p. 8)
F VOLUME knob This adjusts the volume level. (v p. 82)
G Door When you are using buttons and/or connectors behind the door, press the bottom of the door to open it. Be careful not to catch your fingers when closing the door.

.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

15

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

With the door open

qw ert y

u

i o Q0

.
A PURE DIRECT button This switches the sound mode between Direct, Pure Direct and Auto surround. 0 "Direct playback" (v p. 139) 0 "Pure Direct playback" (v p. 139) 0 "Auto surround playback" (v p. 140)
B PURE DIRECT indicator This lights when the "Pure Direct" mode is selected as the sound mode. (v p. 139)

C M-DAX button This switches the M-DAX mode. (v p. 177)
D M-DAX indicator This lights when the M-DAX mode is selected. (v p. 177)
E ZONE2 ON/OFF button This turns the power of ZONE2 (separate room) on/off. (v p. 165)
F ZONE2 SOURCE button This selects the input source for ZONE2. (v p. 165)
G Tuner preset channel buttons (TUNER PRESET CH +, ­) These select preset broadcast stations. (v p. 100)
H DIMMER button Each press of this switches the brightness of the display. (v p. 248)
I STATUS button Each press of this switches the status information that is shown on the display.
J SOUND MODE button Switching the sound mode. (v p. 137)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

16

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4

Playback Q5

Settings

Tips

Appendix

L SETUP MIC jack This is used to connect the supplied Sound calibration microphone. (v p. 208)
M USB port (T) This is used to connect USB storages (such as USB memory devices) and the USB cable supplied with iPod. (v p. 71)
N AUX1-HDMI connector This is used to connect HDMI output compatible devices such as video camcorders and game consoles. (v p. 68)
O AUX1 INPUT connectors Used to connect analog output compatible devices such as video camcorders and game consoles. (v p. 68)

.
K Headphones jack (PHONES) This is used to connect headphones. When the headphones are plugged into this jack, audio will no longer be output from the connected speakers or from the PRE OUT connectors.
NOTE 0 To prevent hearing loss, do not raise the volume level excessively when using
headphones.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

17

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Display

The input source name, sound mode, setting values and other information are displayed here.

o Standard display

o Tuner display
These light up according to the reception conditions when the input source is set to "Tuner".

er

q

w

.

A Volume indicator

B Input source indicator

The currently selected input source name is displayed.

If the input source name has been changed using "Source Rename" in the menu, the input source name after the change is displayed. (v p. 202)

.
C Lights up when the broadcast is properly tuned in. D In the FM mode, this lights up when receiving stereo broadcasts.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

18

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

o Sleep timer indicator

Playback

Settings

Tips

o ZONE2 power on display

y

Appendix

t
.
E This lights when the sleep mode is selected. (v p. 153)

.
This lights up when ZONE2 (separate room) power is turned on. (v p. 165)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

19

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Rear panel
q w er

ty u i

Settings o

Tips

Appendix

Q0

q Q1

Q2

Q3

Q4

Q5

Q6

Q7

.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

20

Remote

Index

Contents qwe r

Connections

Playback q

.
A Bluetooth/wireless LAN antenna connectors Used to connect the included external antennas for Bluetooth/wireless connectivity when connecting to a network via wireless LAN, or when connecting to a handheld device via Bluetooth. (v p. 76)
A Place the external antennas for Bluetooth/wireless connectivity evenly over the screw terminal of rear.
B Turn clockwise until the antennas is fully connected. C Rotate the antenna upwards for best reception.

q

w

e

Settings

Tips

Appendix

B DC OUT jack Used to connect devices equipped with the trigger function. (v p. 78)
C Digital audio connectors (DIGITAL AUDIO) Used to connect devices equipped with digital audio connectors. 0 "Connection 2 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and incompatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel)" (v p. 63) 0 "Connection 3 : TV equipped without an HDMI connector" (v p. 64) 0 "Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)" (v p. 66) 0 "Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player" (v p. 67)
D RS-232C connector Used to connect home automation controller devices fitted with RS-232C connectors. Consult the owner's manual of the home automation controller for more information about serial control of this unit. Perform the operation below beforehand.
A Turn on the power of this unit. B Turn off the power of this unit from the external controller. C Check that the unit is in the standby mode.

.
Front panel

Display

Rear panel

21

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

ty u i

o

Q0 qQ1

.
E FLASHER IN jack Used when using a control BOX or other such control devices to control this unit.
F SIGNAL GND terminal Used to connect a ground wire for the turntable. (v p. 69)
G REMOTE CONTROL jack Used to connect infrared receivers/transmitters in order to operate this unit and external devices from a different room. (v p. 77)

H Video connectors (VIDEO) Used to connect devices equipped with video connectors. 0 "Connection 3 : TV equipped without an HDMI connector" (v p. 64) 0 "Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)" (v p. 66) 0 "Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player" (v p. 67)
I HDMI connectors Used to connect devices equipped with HDMI connectors. 0 "Connection 1 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and compatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel)" (v p. 62) 0 "Connection 2 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and incompatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel)" (v p. 63) 0 "Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)" (v p. 66) 0 "Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player" (v p. 67)
J NETWORK connector Used to connect to a LAN cable when connecting to a wired LAN network. (v p. 75)
K AC inlet (AC IN) Used to connect the power cord. (v p. 79)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

22

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Q2 Q3

Q4

Q5 Q6

Q7

.

L FM/AM antenna terminals (ANTENNA) Used to connect FM antennas and AM loop antennas. (v p. 73)

M Analog audio connectors (AUDIO)

Used to connect devices equipped with analog audio connectors. 0 "Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)" (v p. 66) 0 "Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player" (v p. 67)

Settings

Tips

Appendix

N 7.1-channel input connectors (7.1CH IN) Used to connect to a device that has multi-channel audio output connectors. (v p. 70)
O Speaker terminals (SPEAKERS) Used to connect speakers. (v p. 36)
P PRE OUT connectors Used to connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier or an external power amplifier. 0 "Connecting the subwoofer" (v p. 37) 0 "Connection 3 : Connection using an external amplifier" (v p. 164)
Q Component video connectors (COMPONENT VIDEO) Used to connect devices equipped with component video connectors. 0 "Connection 3 : TV equipped without an HDMI connector" (v p. 64) 0 "Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)" (v p. 66) 0 "Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player" (v p. 67)
NOTE
0 Do not touch the inner pins of the connectors on the rear panel. Electrostatic discharge may cause permanent damage to the unit.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

23

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Remote control unit

q
w
e r t y

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

A ZONE SELECT buttons
These switch the zone (MAIN ZONE, ZONE2) that is operated through the remote control unit. 0 "Playback in ZONE2" (v p. 165) 0 "Menu operations" (v p. 170)
B Input source select buttons
These selects the input source. 0 "Selecting the input source" (v p. 81) 0 "Playback in ZONE2" (v p. 165) C Channel/page search buttons (CH/PAGE df) These select radio stations registered to presets or switch pages. (v p. 100) D MUTE button (:) This mutes the output audio. 0 "Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting)" (v p. 82) 0 "Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting) (ZONE2)" (v p. 166)
E Information button (INFO) This displays the status information on the TV screen. (v p. 252)
F Cursor buttons (uio p) These select items.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

24

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Q1 Q2

Settings

Tips

Appendix

G BACK button This returns to the previous screen.
H System buttons These perform playback related operations. Tuning up / Tuning down buttons (TUNE +, ­) These select either FM broadcast or AM broadcast. (v p. 97)
I SMART SELECT buttons (1 ­ 4) These call up settings registered to each button, such as input source, volume level and sound mode settings. (v p. 155)
J SOUND MODE buttons These select the sound mode. (v p. 137)
K Remote control signal transmitter This transmits signals from the remote control unit. (v p. 8)
L SLEEP button This sets the sleep timer. (v p. 153)

u
i o Q0

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

25

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Q3
Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8

Settings

Tips

Appendix

M POWER button (X) This turns the power on/off. 0 "Turning the power on" (v p. 81) 0 "Playback in ZONE2" (v p. 165)
N ECO Mode button (G) This switches to ECO Mode. (v p. 241)
O VOLUME buttons (df) These adjusts the volume level. 0 "Adjusting the volume" (v p. 82) 0 "Adjusting the volume (ZONE2)" (v p. 166)
P OPTION button This displays the option menu on the TV screen.
Q ENTER button This determines the selection.
R SETUP button This displays the menu on the TV screen. (v p. 170)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

26

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Contents

Connecting speakers

28

Connecting a TV

61

Connecting a playback device

65

Connecting an iPod or USB memory device to the USB port

71

Connecting an FM/AM antenna

73

Connecting to a home network (LAN)

75

Connecting an external control device

77

Connecting the power cord

79

NOTE
0 Do not plug in the power cord until all connections have been completed. However, when the "Setup Assistant" is running, follow the instructions in the "Setup Assistant" (page 9 in the separate "Quick Start Guide") screen for making connections. (During "Setup Assistant" operation, the input/output connectors do not conduct current.)
0 Do not bundle power cords together with connection cables. Doing so can result in noise.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Cables used for connections
Provide necessary cables according to the devices you want to connect.

Speaker cable
.
Subwoofer cable
.
HDMI cable
.

Component video cable

.
Video cable
.
Coaxial digital cable
.
Optical cable
.

Audio cable

L

L

R

R

.

LAN cable
.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

27

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Connecting speakers

Install speakers and connect them to this unit. ("Speaker installation" (v p. 28), "Speaker connection" (v p. 36))
Speaker installation

Determine the speaker system depending on the number of speakers you are using and install each speaker and subwoofer in the room. Speaker installation is explained using this example of a typical installation.

FWL FL SL
SW1
SBL
.

FR

FWR

C

SW2

SR

SB

SBR

FL/FR (Front speaker left/ right):

Place the FRONT left and right speakers an equal distance from the main listening position. The distance between each speaker and your TV should also be the same.

C (Center speaker):

Place the CENTER speaker in between the front speakers and above or below your TV.

Place the SURROUND left and right speakers an

SL/SR

equal distance to the left and right sides of the

(Surround speaker left/ main listening position. If you don't have

right):

surround back speakers, move the surround

speakers slightly behind your listening position.

SBL/SBR (Surround back speaker left/right):

Place the SURROUND BACK left and right speakers an equal distance from the main listening position and directly behind the main listening position. When using a single surround back speaker (SB), place it directly behind the listening position.

FWL/FWR
(Front wide speaker left/right):

Place the FRONT WIDE left and right speakers outside of the front left and right speakers so that there is an equal distance between all front speakers.

SW 1/2 (Subwoofer) :

Place the SUBWOOFER at a convenient location near the front speakers. If you have two subwoofers, place them asymmetrically across the front of your room.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

28

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

TRL

RHL

TML TFL

FHL

TRR TMR TFR
FHR

RHR

.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

FHL/FHR (Front height left/right):

speaker

Place the FRONT HEIGHT left and right speakers directly above the front speakers. Mount them as close to the ceiling as possible and aim them towards the main listening position.

TFL/TFR (Top front speaker left/right):

Mount the TOP FRONT left and right speakers on the ceiling slightly in front of your main listening position and aligned with the left and right front speakers.

TML/TMR

Mount the TOP MIDDLE left and right speakers

(Top middle speaker directly above the main listening position and

left/right):

aligned with the left and right front speakers.

TRL/TRR (Top rear speaker left/right):

Mount the TOP REAR left and right speakers on the ceiling slightly behind your main listening position and aligned with the left and right front speakers.

RHL/RHR (Rear height speaker left/right):

Place the REAR HEIGHT left and right speakers directly behind the main listening position. Mount them as close to the ceiling as possible and aligned with the left and right front speakers.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

29

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

FDL SDL

FDR SDR

Settings

Tips

Appendix

About Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers
Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers reflect the sound off the ceiling to allow the sound to come from over your head by using a special upwardpointing speaker that is placed on the floor.
You can enjoy the Dolby Atmos 3D sound even in an environment where speakers cannot be installed on the ceiling.

BDL

BDR

.

Place the FRONT Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker

FDL/FDR

on the front speaker. For a Dolby Atmos Enabled

(Front Dolby speaker integrated with a front speaker, place the Dolby

left/right):

Atmos Enabled speaker instead of the front

speaker.

Place the SURROUND Dolby Atmos Enabled

.

SDL/SDR

speaker on the surround speaker. For a Dolby

(Surround Dolby

Atmos Enabled speaker integrated with a surround

speaker left/right): speaker, place the Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker

instead of the surround speaker.

Place the BACK Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker on

BDL/BDR

the surround back speaker. For a Dolby Atmos

(Back Dolby speaker Enabled speaker integrated with a surround back

left/right):

speaker, place the Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker

instead of the surround back speaker.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

30

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

0 This unit is compatible with Audyssey DSX®, Dolby Atmos and DTS:X which offers an even wider and deeper surround sensation. When using Audyssey DSX®, install front wide speakers or front height speakers.
0 Use the illustration below as a guide for how high each speaker should be installed. The height does not need to be exactly the same.

Top middle speaker

Top front speaker

Top rear speaker

Front height speaker
Point slightly downwards
Front wide speaker

z1

z3 z4 z5 z2

Rear height speaker
Point slightly downwards
Surround back speaker

Front speaker GViewed from the sideH

Surround speaker

z1 30° - 45° z4 125° - 150°

z2 30° - 55° z5 135° - 150°

z3 65° - 100°

.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Height speakers layout

FHL

FHR

FL

FR

TFL

C

TFR

TML SL
TRL

TMR SR
TRR

RHL

RHR

GViewed from the topH

.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

31

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o When 7.1-channel speakers are installed using surround back speakers

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o When 9.1-channel speakers are installed using front wide speakers

FL

FR

SW C z1
z2
SL

z3 SR

Listening

SBL

position

SBR

.

z1:22° - 30° z2:90° - 110° z3:135° - 150°

0 When using a single surround back speaker, place it directly behind the listening position.

FL

FR

FWL SL

SW C z2 z1

z4 z3

FWR SR

SBL

SBR

.

z1: 22° - 30° z2: 55° - 60° z3: 90° - 110° z4: 135° - 150°

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

32

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o When 5.1-channel speakers are installed

FL

FR

SW C z1 z2

SL

SR

.
z1:22° - 30° z2:120°

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

33

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Layout including height speakers and ceiling speakers
n Height speaker layout example
Combination of 5.1-channel layout and front height/rear height speakers.

RHL FHL

FL

SL

SW

FHR
FR C

RHR SR

Settings

Tips

Appendix

n Ceiling speaker layout example
Combination of 5.1-channel layout and top front/top rear speakers.

TRL TFL

TRR TFR

FL

FR

SL

SW

C

SR

.

.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

34

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

n Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker layout example
Combination of 5.1-channel layout and front Dolby/surround Dolby speakers.

Settings

SDL SL

FDL FL SW

FDR

C

FR

SDR

SR

.

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

35

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Speaker connection
Here we connect the speakers in the room to this unit. This section explains how to connect them using typical examples.
NOTE 0 Disconnect this unit's power plug from the power outlet before connecting the
speakers. Also, turn off the subwoofer. 0 Connect so that the speaker cable core wires do not protrude from the speaker
terminal. The protection circuit may be activated if the core wires touch the rear panel or if the + and - sides touch each other. ("Protection circuit" (v p. 302)) 0 Never touch the speaker terminals while the power cord is connected. Doing so could result in electric shock. When the "Setup Assistant" (page 9 in the separate "Quick Start Guide") is running, follow the instructions in the "Setup Assistant" screen for making connections. (Power is not supplied to the speaker terminals while the "Setup Assistant" is running.) 0 Use speakers with an impedance of 4 ­ 16 /ohms.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

NOTE
0 Carry out the following settings when using a speaker with an impedance of 4 ­ 6 /ohms.
1. Press and hold the main unit's ZONE2 SOURCE and STATUS at the same time for at least 3 seconds.
"Video Format < NTSC>" appears on the display. 2. Press DIMMER on the main unit twice.
"Sp.Imp. <8ohms>" appears on the display. 3. Press TUNER PRESET CH + or TUNER PRESET CH  on the main unit to
select the impedance.

6ohms:

Select when the impedance for any of the connected speakers is 6 /ohms.

4ohms:

Select when the impedance for any of the connected speakers is 4 /ohms.

4. Press the main unit's STATUS to complete the setting.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

36

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Connecting the speaker cables
Carefully check the left (L) and right (R) channels and + (red) and ­ (black) polarities on the speakers being connected to this unit, and be sure to connect the channels and polarities correctly.
1 Peel off about 3/8 inch (10 mm) of sheathing from the tip of the speaker cable, then either twist the core wire tightly or terminate it.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Connecting the subwoofer
Use a subwoofer cable to connect the subwoofer. Two subwoofers can be connected to this unit. To use two subwoofers, set "Subwoofer" to "2 spkrs" in the "Speaker Config." setting. (v p. 222) The level and distance can be set separately for Subwoofer 1 and Subwoofer 2.

.
2 Turn the speaker terminal counterclockwise to loosen it.

.
3 Insert the speaker cable's core wire to the hilt into the speaker terminal.

SW1
.

SW2

.
4 Turn the speaker terminal clockwise to tighten it.

Front panel

.
Display

Rear panel

37

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o About the cable label (supplied) for channel identification
The channel display section for speaker terminals on the rear panel is color-coded for each channel to be identifiable. Attach the cable label corresponding to each speaker to each speaker cable. This makes it easy to connect the correct cable to the speaker terminals on the rear panel.

Settings

Tips

Speaker terminals FRONT L FRONT R CENTER SURROUND L SURROUND R SURROUND BACK L SURROUND BACK R FRONT WIDE L FRONT WIDE R FRONT HEIGHT L FRONT HEIGHT R TOP FRONT L TOP FRONT R TOP MIDDLE L TOP MIDDLE R TOP REAR L TOP REAR R REAR HEIGHT L REAR HEIGHT R FRONT DOLBY L FRONT DOLBY R SURROUND DOLBY L SURROUND DOLBY R BACK DOLBY L BACK DOLBY R SUBWOOFER

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

38

Remote

Index

Appendix
Color White Red Green Light blue Blue Beige Brown Light Purple Purple Light Yellow Yellow Light Yellow Yellow Light Yellow Yellow Light Yellow Yellow Light Yellow Yellow Light Yellow Yellow Light Yellow Yellow Light Yellow Yellow Black

Contents

Connections

Playback

Attach the cable label for each channel to its speaker cable as shown in the diagram. Refer to the table and attach the label to each speaker cable. Then, make connection so that the color of the speaker terminal matches that of the cable label.
G How to attach the cable label H

Speaker

This unit

Settings

.

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

39

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Speaker configuration and "Amp Assign" settings

This unit has a built-in 7-channel power amplifier. In addition to the basic 5.1-channel system, a variety of speaker systems can be configured by changing
the "Amp Assign" settings to suit the application, such as 7.1-channel systems, bi-amp connections and 2-channel systems for multi-zone playback. (v p. 216) Perform "Amp Assign" settings to suit the number of rooms and speaker configuration to be installed. (v p. 216)

Playback speaker in each zone MAIN ZONE

ZONE2

"Amp Assign" settings

Connection page

5.1-channel playback

Can be set in all "Amp Assign" modes.

42

7.1-channel playback

7.1ch

43

9.1-channel playback

9.1ch

48

2-channel (Pre-out)

5.1-channel playback (bi-amp connection of front speakers)

5.1ch (Bi-Amp)

56

7.1-channel playback + 2-channel speakers for stereo playback

7.1ch/2ch Front

57

5.1-channel playback + second pair of front speakers

5.1ch + Front B

58

5.1-channel playback

2-channel

5.1ch + ZONE2 (Default)

59

(Speaker out)

The sound mode that can be selected varies according to the speaker configuration. See "Relationship between sound modes and channel output" (v p. 286) for the sound modes that are supported. The following pages provide basic connection examples.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

40

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

0 In addition to the connections described in p.42 - 60, this unit allows for various speaker connections with the "Amp Assign" setting.
Also refer to the menu screen in "View Terminal Config." on the "Amp Assign" setting screen, which shows how to make connections in your environment.

Speakers/Amp Assign Assign Mode

9.1ch

PRE OUT
SPEAKERS
FRONT

SUBWOOFER 12

SURR.BACK

FRONT

CENTER

SURROUND

SURROUND

Back
.

HF.EHIGEIHGTH1T

FH.HEEIGIGHHT1T

AUTO SWITCHING

F.WIDE

F.WIDE

AUTO SWITCHING

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

41

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o 5.1-channel playback
This serves as a basic 5.1-channel surround system.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

FL

FR

SW C

SL

SR

.

SURROUND BACK SURROUND BACK

SW
.

FR FL C SR SL

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

42

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o 7.1-channel playback
System for 7.1-channel surround playback. You can connect speakers for up to 11-channels for MAIN ZONE. When you connect speakers for 8 or more channels, the output speakers automatically switch according to the input signal and sound mode.
n Example connections when using surround back speakers
This 7.1-channel surround system is the same as a basic 5.1-channel system but with surround back speakers.

FL

FR

SW C
SL
SBL
.

SR SBR

0 Set "Floor" - "Layout" to "5ch & SB & FW" or "5ch & SB" in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (v p. 217)

SW
.

FR FL C SR SL SBR SBL

0 When using a single surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND BACK L terminal.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

43

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

n Example connections when using front wide speakers
This 7.1-channel surround system is the same as a basic 5.1-channel system but with front wide speakers.

Appendix

FL

FR

SW C FWL
SL

FWR SR

.

SW

FR FL C SR SL

.

0 Set "Floor" - "Layout" to "5ch & SB & FW" or "5ch & FW" in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (v p. 217)

FWR FWL

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

44

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

n Example connections when using ceiling speakers
This 7.1-channel surround system is the same as a basic 5.1-channel system but with ceiling speakers.

TML

TMR

FL

FR

SL

SW

C

SR

Appendix

SW

FR FL C SR SL

TMR TML

.

.

0 Set "Height Sp" to "2ch" in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (v p. 218) 0 The top front or top rear speakers can be connected instead of the top middle speakers. In this case, set the ceiling speakers to be connected under "Height" - "Layout" in the
menu. (v p. 219)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

45

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

n Example connections when using height speakers
This 7.1-channel surround system is the same as a basic 5.1-channel system but with front height speakers.

FHL

FHR

FL

FR

Appendix

SW C

SL

SR

.

SW
.

FR FL C SR SL

FHR FHL

0 Set "Height Sp" to "2ch" in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (v p. 218) 0 The rear height speakers can be connected instead of the front height speakers. In this case, set the height speakers to be connected under "Height" - "Layout" in the menu.
(v p. 219)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

46

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

n Example connections when using Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers
This 7.1-channel surround system is the same as a basic 5.1-channel system but with front Dolby speakers.

Appendix

FDL

FDR

SL

FL SW

C

FR

SR

SW

FR FL C SR SL

FDR FDL

.

.

0 Set "Dolby Sp" to "2ch" in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (v p. 218) 0 The surround Dolby speakers can be connected instead of the front Dolby speakers. In this case, set the Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers to be connected under "Height" -
"Layout" in the menu. (v p. 219)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

47

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o 9.1-channel playback
System for 9.1-channel surround playback. You can connect speakers for up to 13-channels for MAIN ZONE by using an external power amplifier. When you connect speakers for 10 or more channels, the output speakers automatically switch according to the input signal and sound mode.
n Example connection when using surround back and front wide speakers

FL

FR

SBR SBL

SW C FWL
SL

FWR SR

SBL
.

SBR

Power amplifier

SW
.

FR FL C SR SL

0 Set "Floor" - "Layout" to "5ch & SB & FW" in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (v p. 217)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

48

Remote

Index

FWR FWL

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

n Example connection when using one set of ceiling speakers

TML

TMR

Tips TMR TML

FL

FR

SL

SW

C

SR

Power amplifier

SBL
.

SBR

0 Set "Height" - "Height Sp" to "2ch" in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (v p. 218)

Appendix

SW
.

FR FL C SR SL SBR SBL

z The top front or top rear speakers can be connected instead of the top middle

speakers. In this case, set the ceiling speakers to be connected under "Height" "Layout" in the menu. (v p. 219)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

49

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

n Example connection when using two sets of ceiling speakers

TRL TFL

TRR TFR

HEIGHT 2z TRR TRL

FL

FR

SL

SW

C

SR

Power amplifier

Appendix

.
0 Set "Height Sp" to "4ch" in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (v p. 218)

SW

FR FL C SR SL

TFR TFL

HEIGHT 1z
.

z You can change the combination of the HEIGHT1 and HEIGHT2 channels in the settings. (v p. 55)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

50

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

n Example connection when using one set of height speakers

FHL

FHR

Tips FHR FHL

FL

FR

SL

SW

C

SR

Power amplifier

SBL
.

SBR

0 Set "Height" - "Height Sp" to "2ch" in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (v p. 218)

Appendix

SW
.

FR FL C SR SL SBR SBL

z The rear height speakers can be connected instead of the front height speakers.

In this case, set the height speakers to be connected under "Height" - "Layout" in the menu. (v p. 219)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

51

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

n Example connection when using two sets of height speakers

RHL FHL

RHR FHR

Tips
HEIGHT 2z RHR RHL

FL

FR

SL

SW

C

SR

Power amplifier

Appendix

.
0 Set "Height Sp" to "4ch" in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (v p. 218)

SW

FR FL C SR SL

FHR FHL

HEIGHT 1z
.
z You can change the combination of the HEIGHT1 and HEIGHT2 channels in the settings. (v p. 55)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

52

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

n Example connection when using one set of Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers

FDR FDL

FDL

FDR

SL

FL SW

C

FR

SR

Power amplifier

SBL
.

SBR

0 Set "Height" - "Dolby Sp" to "2ch" in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (v p. 218)

Appendix

SW
.

FR FL C SR SL SBR SBL

z The surround Dolby speakers can be connected instead of the front Dolby

speakers. In this case, set the Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers to be connected under "Height" - "Layout" in the menu. (v p. 219)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

53

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

n Example connection when using two sets of Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers

HEIGHT 2z SDR SDL

FDL

SDL

FL SW

SL

FDR

C

FR

SDR

SR

Power amplifier

Appendix

.
0 Set "Dolby Sp" to "4ch" in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (v p. 218)

SW
.

FR FL C SR SL SBR SBL

FDR FDL HEIGHT 1z

z You can change the combination of the HEIGHT1 and HEIGHT2 channels in the settings. (v p. 55)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

54

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

z The combination of the HEIGHT1 and HEIGHT2 channels can be changed to the following patterns according to the speaker system being used. Set this from "Amp Assign" in the menu. (v p. 216)

Combination of height speakers to be used

Number of height/ ceiling speakers

Number of Dolby Speakers

Combination pattern

Front Height

Top Front

2 speakers

None

Top Middle

Top Rear

Rear Height

Front Height & Top Middle

Front Height & Top Rear

4 speakers

None

Front Height & Rear Height Top Front & Top Rear

Top Front & Rear Height

Top Middle & Rear Height

Front Dolby

None

2 speakers

Surround Dolby

Back Dolby

Front Dolby & Top Rear

2 speakers

2 speakers

Front Dolby & Rear Height Front Height & Surr. Dolby

Top Front & Surround Dolby

None

4 speakers

Front Dolby & Surround Dolby

Connected terminals

HEIGHT1 SPEAKER

HEIGHT2 PRE OUT

Front Height Top Front Top Middle Top Rear Rear Height
Front Height Front Height Front Height
Top Front Top Front Top Middle Front Dolby Surround Dolby Back Dolby Front Dolby Front Dolby Front Height Top Front Front Dolby

Top Middle Top Rear Rear Height Top Rear Rear Height Rear Height Top Rear Rear Height Surround Dolby Surround Dolby Surround Dolby

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

55

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

n 5.1-channel (bi-amp connection of front speakers)
This system plays back 5.1-channels. You can use the bi-amp connection for front speakers. Bi-amp connection is a method to connect separate amplifiers to the tweeter terminal and woofer terminal of a speaker that supports bi-amplification. This connection enables back EMF (power returned without being output) from the woofer to flow into the tweeter without affecting the sound quality, producing a higher sound quality.

FL (Bi-Amp)

FR (Bi-Amp)

SW C

SL

SR

.

SW

C SR SL

(R)

(L)

qw

FR

FL

.

NOTE 0 When making bi-amp connections, be sure to remove the short-circuiting plate or wire between the speaker's woofer and tweeter terminals.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

56

Remote

Index

q w

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

n 7.1-channel + speakers used exclusively for 2-channel playback
You can connect speakers used exclusively for 2-channel playback, which are used for the direct and stereo modes, and speakers used exclusively for 7.1 multi-channel playback. The speakers used exclusively for multi-channel playback and the speakers used exclusively for 2-channel playback are automatically switched for playback in accordance with the sound mode.

Multi-channel playback

FL' FL

FR FR'

SW C

SL

SR

SBL

SBR

Switching

FL' FL

FR FR'

SW C

SL

SR

SBL

SBR

2-channel playback
.

SW
.

FR FL C SR SL SBR SBL

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

57

Remote

Index

FR' FL'

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

n 5.1-channel + second pair of front speakers
This system enables switching playback between front speakers A and B as desired.

Tips

Appendix

FL FL (B) (A)

FR FR (A) (B)

SW C

SL

SR

.

SW
.

FR FL C SR SL FR FL

(A) (A)

(B) (B)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

58

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

n 5.1-channel (MAIN ZONE) + 2-channel (ZONE2)
This type of configuration plays back 5.1-channels in MAIN ZONE and 2-channels in ZONE2.

MAIN ZONE

Tips

Appendix

FL

FR

SW C

SL

SR

ZONE2

ZONE2 L

ZONE2 R

SW
.

FR FL C SR SL

ZONE2 ZONE2

R

L

.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

59

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Connecting an external power amplifier
You can use this unit as a pre-amp by connecting an external power amplifier to the PRE OUT connectors. By adding a power amplifier to each channel, the realness of the sound can be further enhanced. Select the terminal to use and connect the device.

Subwoofer (Primary)
AUDIO
SUBWOOFER
1

FRONT CENTER LR

Power amplifiers

AUDIO

HEIGHT2 HEIGHT1

LR

LR

FRONT SURROUND SURROUND

WIDE

BACK

LR LR

LR

Subwoofer (Secondary)
AUDIO
SUBWOOFER
2

LR

LR

LR

LR

LR

LR

LR

LR

LR

LR

LR

LR

.

0 When using just one surround back speaker, connect it to the left channel (L) terminal.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

60

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Connecting a TV
Connect a TV to this unit so that the input video is output to the TV. You can also enjoy audio from the TV on this unit. How to connect a TV depends on the connectors and functions equipped on the TV. ARC (Audio Return Channel) function plays TV audio on this unit by sending the TV audio signal to this unit via HDMI cable.

Appendix

Is the TV equipped with an HDMI connector? Yes

Is the TV compatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) ?

Yes

No

.

"Connection 1 : TV equipped with an HDMI

"Connection 2 : TV equipped with an HDMI

connector and compatible with the ARC (Audio connector and incompatible with the ARC (Audio

Return Channel)" (v p. 62)

Return Channel)" (v p. 63)

No "Connection 3 : TV equipped without an HDMI connector" (v p. 64)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

61

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Connection 1 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and compatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel)
Use an HDMI cable to connect a TV that is compatible with the ARC function to this unit. Set "HDMI Control" to "On" when using a TV that supports the ARC function. (v p. 189)
TV
HDMI IN
(ARC)

.
0 When using the HDMI control function, connect to the HDMI MONITOR connector.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

62

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Connection 2 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and incompatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel)

Use an HDMI cable to connect the TV to this unit. To listen to audio from TV on this unit, use an optical cable to connect the TV to this unit.

OUT
OPTICAL OUT

TV

IN
HDMI IN

.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

63

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Connection 3 : TV equipped without an HDMI connector

Use a component video or a video cable to connect the TV to this unit. To listen to audio from TV on this unit, use an optical cable to connect the TV to this unit.

OUT
OPTICAL OUT

TV
VIDEO IN

IN
COMPONENT VIDEO IN
Y PB PR

or

Tips

Appendix

.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

64

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Connecting a playback device
This unit is equipped with three types of video input connectors (HDMI, component video and composite video) and three types of audio input connectors (HDMI, digital audio and audio). Select input connectors on this unit according to the connectors equipped on the device you want to connect. If the device connected to this unit is equipped with an HDMI connector, it is recommended to use HDMI connections. In the HDMI connection, audio and video signals can be transmitted through a single HDMI cable.
0 "Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)" (v p. 66) 0 "Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player" (v p. 67) 0 "Connecting a video camcorder or game console" (v p. 68) 0 "Connecting a turntable" (v p. 69)

0 Connect devices to this unit as indicated by the input sources printed on the audio/video input connectors of this unit.
0 The source that is assigned to the HDMI IN, DIGITAL AUDIO IN, COMPONENT VIDEO IN, VIDEO IN and AUDIO IN connectors can be changed. See "Input Assign" on how to change the input source assigned to the input connectors. (v p. 200)
0 To play back audio signals that are input to this unit on a TV connected via HDMI, set in the menu "HDMI Audio Out" to "TV". (v p. 189) 0 To enjoy content that is copyright protected by HDCP 2.2, use a playback device and TV compatible with HDCP 2.2 only.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

65

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)

This explanation uses the connection with a satellite tuner/cable TV STB as an example. Select the input connectors on this unit to match the connectors on the device that you want to connect to.

(HDMI incompatible device)

Satellite tuner/

Cable TV

AUDIO

AUDIO OUT
RL

COAXIAL OUT

VIDEO OUT

VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Y PB PR

Satellite tuner/ Cable TV
HDMI OUT

RL

or

or

RL

Appendix

.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

66

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player

This explanation uses the connection with a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player as an example. Select the input connectors on this unit to match the connectors on the device that you want to connect to.

(HDMI incompatible device) DVD player

AUDIO

AUDIO OUT
RL

COAXIAL OUT

VIDEO OUT

VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Y PB PR

DVD player
HDMI OUT

Blu-ray Disc player
HDMI OUT

RL

or

or

RL

Appendix

.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

67

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Connecting a video camcorder or game console

This explanation uses the connection with a video camcorders as an example. Connect a playback device to this unit, such as a video camcorder or game console.

(HDMI incompatible device)

Video camcorder

AUDIO
AUDIO OUT
LR

VIDEO
VIDEO OUT

Video camcorder
HDMI OUT

LR

LR

.

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

68

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Connecting a turntable
This unit is compatible with turntables equipped with a moving magnet (MM) phono cartridge. When you connect to a turntable with a low output moving coil (MC) cartridge, use a commercially available MC head amp or a step-up transformer. If you set this unit's input source to "Phono" and you accidentally increase the volume without having a turntable connected, you may hear a hum noise from the speakers.
Turntable (MM cartridge)

AUDIO OUT
LR

GND

NOTE
0 The earth terminal (SIGNAL GND) of this unit is not for safety grounding purposes. If this terminal is connected when there is a lot of noise, the noise can be reduced. Note that depending on the turntable, connecting the ground line may have the reverse effect of increasing noise. In this case, it is not necessary to connect the ground line.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

69

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Connecting a device with a multi-channel output connector

You can connect this unit to an external device fitted with multi-channel sound audio output connectors to enjoy music and video. To play analog signals input from 7.1CH IN connectors, set "Input Mode" to "7.1CH IN". (v p. 204)

Devices with a multi-channel output connector

(Blu-ray Disc player, DVD player, External decoder etc.)

SUBWOOFER

FRONT LR

AUDIO CENTER SURROUND
LR

SURROUND BACK
LR

LR

LR

LR

LR

LR

LR

.

0 The video signal can be connected in the same way as a Blu-ray Disc player/DVD player. "Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player" (v p. 67)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

70

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Connecting an iPod or USB memory device to the USB port
To connect an iPod to this unit, use the USB adapter cable that was supplied with the iPod. For operating instructions see "Playing an iPod" (v p. 83) or "Playing a USB memory device" (v p. 88).
iPod USB memory
device
or

Appendix

.
0 Marantz does not guarantee that all USB memory devices will operate or receive power. When using a portable USB hard disk drive (HDD) which came with an AC adapter, use that device's supplied AC adapter.
NOTE 0 USB memory devices will not work via a USB hub. 0 It is not possible to use this unit by connecting the unit's USB port to a PC via a USB cable. 0 Do not use an extension cable when connecting a USB memory device. This may cause radio interference with other devices.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

71

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

o Supported iPod/iPhone models
· iPod classic

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

· iPod nano

· iPod touch

· iPhone

.
Front panel

Display

Rear panel

72

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Connecting an FM/AM antenna
Connect the antenna, tune in to a broadcast and then move the antenna to the location where there is least noise. Then use tape, etc. to fix the antenna in this location. ("Listening to FM/AM broadcasts" (v p. 96))

0 If you are unable to receive a good broadcast signal, we recommend installing an outdoor antenna. For details, inquire at the retail store where you purchased the unit.
NOTE 0 Make sure the AM loop antenna lead terminals do not touch metal parts of the
panel.

Settings

Tips

AM loop antenna (supplied)

Black White
.

qw

e

Appendix
FM indoor antenna (supplied)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

73

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

o Using the AM loop antenna
Suspending on a wall Suspend directly on a wall without assembling.

Playback

Nail, tack, etc.
.
Standing alone Use the procedure shown above to assemble. When assembling, refer to "AM loop antenna assembly".

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o AM loop antenna assembly

1 Put the stand section through the bottom of the loop antenna from the rear and bend it forward.

2 Insert the projecting part into the square hole in the stand.

Loop antenna

Stand Square hole

Projecting part

..

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

74

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Connecting to a home network (LAN)

This unit can connect to a network using a wired LAN or wireless LAN. You can connect this unit to your home network (LAN) to enable various types of playback and operations as described below. 0 Playback of network audio such as Internet Radio and from your media
server(s) 0 Using the Apple AirPlay function 0 Operation on this unit via the network 0 Firmware Update
For connections to the Internet, contact an ISP (Internet Service Provider) or a computer shop.

Wired LAN

To make connections via wired LAN, use a LAN cable to connect the router to this unit as shown in the figure below.

Internet

PC Modem

NAS (Network Attached
Storage)

Router

To WAN side
To LAN port To LAN port

LAN port/ Ethernet connector

LAN port/ Ethernet connector

.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

75

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Wireless LAN

When connecting to the network via wireless LAN, connect the external antennas for Bluetooth/wireless connectivity connection to the rear panel and stand them upright.
See "Wi-Fi Setup" on how to connect to a wireless LAN router. (v p. 233)

Internet

Modem

To WAN side

Router with access point

Settings

Tips

Appendix

0 When using this unit, we recommend you use a router equipped with the following functions:
0 Built-in DHCP server This function automatically assigns IP addresses on the LAN.
0 Built-in 100BASE-TX switch When connecting multiple devices, we recommend a switching hub with a speed of 100 Mbps or greater.
0 Only use a shielded STP or ScTP LAN cable (readily available at electronics stores). (CAT-5 or greater recommended)
0 The normal shielded-type LAN cable is recommended. If a flat-type cable or unshielded-type cable is used, other devices could be affected by noise.
0 When using a router that supports the WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) function, WiFi connection can be carried out easily.
0 When using this unit connected to a network with no DHCP function, configure the IP address, etc. in "Network". (v p. 232)
NOTE
0 The types of routers that can be used depend on the ISP. Contact your ISP or a computer shop for details.
0 This unit is not compatible with PPPoE. A PPPoE compatible router is required if your contracted line is not set using PPPoE.
0 Do not connect a NETWORK connector directly to the LAN port / Ethernet connector on your computer.
0 Various online services may be discontinued without prior notice.

.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

76

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Connecting an external control device

REMOTE CONTROL jacks
o Performing operations by RC on this unit without visual contact
You can connect an external IR receiver to the REMOTE CONTROL connectors to perform operations on this unit with the supplied remote control unit without visual contact. This might be necessary if the unit is hidden in a cupboard or corner, so you can't directly point with the remote control unit to the device. To do this, disable the remote control signal receiving function ("Remote lock function" (v p. 162)).

RC OUT

IR receiver

o Remotely connecting Marantz devices
When you are using a Marantz device other than this unit that supports remote connection, you can transmit remote control signals just by connecting the device to the REMOTE CONTROL IN/OUT connector with a monaural cable. Set the remote control switch located on the rear panel of the connected audio component to "EXTERNAL" or "EXT." to use this feature.

.
NOTE 0 When the remote control signal receiving function is disabled, you can not perform
operations with the remote control unit.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

.

77

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

DC OUT jack
When a device with DC IN jack is connected, the connected device's power on/standby can be controlled through linked operation to this unit. The DC OUT jack outputs a maximum 12 V DC /150 mA electrical signal.
12 V DC/150 mA trigger-compatible device

.
NOTE 0 Use a monaural mini-plug cable for connecting the DC OUT jack. Do not use a stereo mini-plug cable. 0 If the permissible trigger input level for the connected device is larger than 12 V DC/150 mA, or has shorted, the DC OUT jack cannot be used. In this case, turn off the power
to the unit, and disconnect it.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

78

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Connecting the power cord
After completing all the connections, insert the power plug into the power outlet.

Tips

Appendix

Power cord (supplied)
To household power outlet (AC 120 V, 60 Hz)
.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

79

Remote

Index

Contents
o Contents

Connections

Basic operation
Turning the power on Selecting the input source Adjusting the volume Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting) Selecting a sound mode
Playback a device
Playing a DVD player/Blu-ray Disc player Playing an iPod Playing a USB memory device Listening to music on a Bluetooth device Listening to FM/AM broadcasts

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Playback network audio/service

Listening to Internet Radio

104

Playing back files stored on a PC and NAS

108

81 Listening to Pandora®

112

81 Listening to SiriusXM Internet Radio

119

82 AirPlay function

122

82 Spotify Connect function

125

137

Convenience functions

Convenience functions

126

82 HDMI control function

150

83 Smart Menu function

151

88 Sleep timer function

153

91 Smart select function

155

96 Panel lock function

160

Remote lock function

162

Other functions

Web control function

158

Playback in ZONE2 (Separate room)

163

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

80

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Basic operation

Playback

Input source select buttons
MUTE :

ZONE SELECT MAIN ZONE 2

SLEEP

POWER

CBL /SAT

DVD

GAME

AUX1

TV AUDIO

AUX2

Blu-ray MEDIA PLAYER TUNER

iPod/USB

CD

Bluetooth

ONLINE MUSIC

PHONO ECO

INTERNET RADIO

CH / PAGE

MUTE

VOLUME

INFO

OPTION

BACK

ENTER

SETUP

POWER X VOLUME df

TUNE -

TUNE +

SMART SELECT
1234

MOVIE

SOUND MODE MUSIC GAME

PURE

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Turning the power on
1 Press POWER X to turn on power to the unit.
0 You can press the input source select button when the unit is in standby mode to turn on the power.
0 You can also switch the power to standby by pressing X on the main unit.
Selecting the input source
1 Press the input source select button to be played back. The desired input source can be selected directly.
0 You can also select the input source by turning INPUT SELECTOR on the main unit.

.
Front panel

Display

Rear panel

81

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Adjusting the volume
1 Use VOLUME df to adjust the volume.

0 The variable range differs according to the input signal and channel level setting. 0 You can also adjust the master volume by turning VOLUME on the main unit.

Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting)
1 Press MUTE :. 0 "MUTE" appears on the display. 0 : appears on the TV screen.
0 The sound is reduced to the level set at "Mute Level" in the menu. (v p. 179) 0 To cancel mute, either adjust the sound volume or press MUTE : again.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Playback a DVD player/Blu-ray Disc player
The following describes the procedure for playing DVD player/Blu-ray Disc player.
1 Prepare for playback. A Turn on the power of the TV, subwoofer and player. B Change the TV input to the input of this unit.
2 Press POWER X to turn on power to the unit. 3 Press DVD or Blu-ray to switch an input source for a
player used for playback.
4 Play the DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player.
o Surround playback (v p. 137)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

82

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playing an iPod

Playback

iPod/USB
CH/PAGE df
uio p ENTER
BACK

ZONE SELECT

POWER

MAIN ZONE 2 SLEEP

CBL /SAT

DVD

GAME

AUX1

TV AUDIO

AUX2

Blu-ray MEDIA PLAYER TUNER

iPod/USB

CD

Bluetooth

ONLINE MUSIC

PHONO ECO

INTERNET RADIO

CH / PAGE

MUTE

VOLUME

INFO

OPTION

ENTER

BACK

SETUP

TUNE -

TUNE +

SMART SELECT
1234

SOUND MODE MOVIE MUSIC GAME

PURE

OPTION
1/3 8 9

Settings

Tips

Appendix

0 You can use the USB cable provided with the iPod to connect the iPod with the unit's USB port and enjoy music stored on the iPod.
0 For information on the iPod models that can be played back with this unit, see "Supported iPod/iPhone models" (v p. 72).
0 See "AirPlay function" (v p. 122) on how to play a music file saved on an iPhone, iPod touch, iPad or iTunes on this unit via the network.

.
Front panel

Display

Rear panel

83

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Listening to music on an iPod
1 Connect the iPod to the USB port. (v p. 71) 2 Press iPod/USB to switch the input source to "iPod/
USB". "Browse from iPod" is displayed on the display of this unit. 0 Nothing is displayed on the TV screen.
3 Operate iPod itself while seeing the iPod screen to play back music.

0 "iPod Browse Mode" has two modes, "From iPod" and "On-Screen". The default setting is "From iPod" that operate the iPod itself while looking at the iPod screen.
0 To change to "On-Screen", where you perform operations while having the iPod information displayed on the TV screen, see "iPod Browse Mode settings" (v p. 85).
NOTE 0 Depending on the type of iPod and the software version, some functions may not
operate. 0 Note that Marantz will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any problems
arising with the data on an iPod when using this unit in conjunction with the iPod.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Operations accessible through the option menu
This can be operated when the "iPod Browse Mode" is set to "From iPod". (v p. 85) 0 "iPod Browse Mode settings" (v p. 85) 0 "Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source
(Channel Level Adjust)" (v p. 132) 0 "Adjusting the tone (Tone)" (v p. 133) 0 "Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video
Select)" (v p. 134) 0 "Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment (Picture
Mode)" (v p. 135) 0 "Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)" (v p. 136)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

84

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

iPod Browse Mode settings

In this mode, various lists and screens during playback on the iPod are displayed on the TV screen.
This section describes the steps up to playing back tracks on the iPod in "On-Screen".

1 Press OPTION when the input source is "iPod/USB". The option menu screen is displayed.

2 Select "iPod Browse Mode", then press ENTER. The "iPod Browse Mode" screen is displayed.

3 Use o p to select "On-Screen", then press ENTER. 0 Operations available for "On-Screen" and "From iPod" are listed below.

iPod Browse Mode

Playable files

Music file Video file

From iPod P
z

On-Screen P

Active buttons

Remote control unit (This unit)
iPod

P

P

P zOnly the sound is played.

4 Use ui p to select the file to be played, then press ENTER. Playback starts.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Operation buttons 1/3

Function Playback / Pause

8 9

Skip to previous track / Skip to next track (Press and hold) Fast-reverse/Fast-forward

ENTER

Playback / Pause (Press and hold) Stop

u i

Skip to previous track / Skip to next track
(Press and hold) Fast-reverse / Fastforward

CH/PAGE d f

Switch to the previous page/next page in the list display

0 The actions of the operation buttons may differ.

0 The display switches between track title, artist name, and album title etc. each time the main unit's STATUS is pressed during playback with "iPod Browse Mode" set to "On-Screen".
0 English letters, numbers and certain symbols are displayed. Incompatible characters are displayed as "." (period).

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

85

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Operations accessible through the option menu
This can be operated when the "iPod Browse Mode" is set to "OnScreen". (v p. 85) 0 "iPod Browse Mode settings" (v p. 85) 0 "Performing repeat playback" (v p. 87) 0 "Performing random playback" (v p. 87)
0 "Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source (Channel Level Adjust)" (v p. 132)
0 "Adjusting the tone (Tone)" (v p. 133)
0 "Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video Select)" (v p. 134)
0 "Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)" (v p. 136)

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

86

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Performing repeat playback

Performing random playback

1 Press OPTION with "iPod Browse Mode" set to "OnScreen". The option menu screen is displayed.
2 Use ui to select "Repeat", then press ENTER. 3 Use o p to select repeat playback mode.

Off (Default) : One:
All:

Repeat playback mode is canceled.
A file being played is played repeatedly. All files in the folder currently being played are played repeatedly.

4 Press ENTER. The display returns to the playback screen.

0 "Repeat" settings are stored for each input source.

1 Press OPTION with "iPod Browse Mode" set to "OnScreen". The option menu screen is displayed.
2 Use ui to select "Random", then press ENTER. 3 Use o p to select random playback mode.

Off (Default):
On:

Disable random playback.
Randomly play back all tracks in the current playback folder.

4 Press ENTER. The display returns to the playback screen.

0 During random playback, each time playback of a track is completed, another track is randomly selected for playback from tracks in the folder. Therefore, it's possible that you may hear a track played back more than once during random playback.
0 "Random" settings are stored for each input source.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

87

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Playing a USB memory device

iPod/USB
CH/PAGE df
ui p ENTER
BACK

ZONE SELECT

POWER

MAIN ZONE 2 SLEEP

CBL /SAT

DVD

GAME

AUX1

TV AUDIO

AUX2

Blu-ray MEDIA PLAYER TUNER

iPod/USB

CD

Bluetooth

ONLINE MUSIC

PHONO ECO

INTERNET RADIO

CH / PAGE

MUTE

VOLUME

INFO

OPTION

ENTER

BACK

SETUP

TUNE -

TUNE +

SMART SELECT
1234

SOUND MODE MOVIE MUSIC GAME

PURE

OPTION
1/3 8 9

Settings

Tips

Appendix

0 Playing back music or viewing still picture (JPEG) files stored on a USB memory device.
0 Only USB memory devices conforming to mass storage class standards can be played on this unit.
0 This unit is compatible with USB memory devices in "FAT16" or "FAT32" format.
0 The audio/video format types and specifications supported by this unit for playback are as follows. See "Playing back a USB memory devices" (v p. 282) for details.
0 WMA 0 MP3 0 WAV 0 MPEG-4 AAC 0 FLAC 0 ALAC 0 AIFF 0 DSD 0 JPEG

.
Front panel

Display

Rear panel

88

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Playing files stored on USB memory devices
1 Connect the USB memory device to the USB port. (v p. 71)
2 Press iPod/USB to switch the input source to "iPod/ USB".

USB

[1/9]

Folder1 Folder2 Folder3 Music1 Music2 Music3 Music4

OPTION Option

.
3 Use ui p to select the file to be played, then press ENTER. Playback starts.

Settings Operation buttons 1/3 8 9
ENTER
u i CH/PAGE d f

Tips

Appendix

Function Playback / Pause Skip to previous track / Skip to next track (Press and hold) Fast-reverse / Fastforward Playback / Pause (Press and hold) Stop Skip to previous track / Skip to next track (Press and hold) Fast-reverse / Fastforward Switch to the previous page/next page in the list display

0 When an MP3 music file includes album art data, the album art can be displayed while playing the file.
0 This unit plays back picture (JPEG) files in the order in which they are stored in the folder.
NOTE 0 Note that Marantz will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any problems arising
with the data on a USB memory device when using this unit in conjunction with the USB memory device.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

89

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Operations accessible through the option menu
0 "Performing repeat playback" (v p. 127) 0 "Performing random playback" (v p. 127) 0 "Searching content with keywords (Text Search)" (v p. 129)
0 "Playing back music and a favorite picture at the same time (Slideshow)" (v p. 130)
0 "Setting the Slideshow Interval" (v p. 131)
0 "Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source (Channel Level Adjust)" (v p. 132)
0 "Adjusting the tone (Tone)" (v p. 133)
0 "Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video Select)" (v p. 134)
0 "Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment (Picture Mode)" (v p. 135)
0 "Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)" (v p. 136)

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

90

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Listening to music on a Bluetooth device

ZONE SELECT

POWER

MAIN ZONE 2 SLEEP

CBL /SAT

DVD

GAME

AUX1

TV AUDIO

AUX2

Blu-ray MEDIA PLAYER TUNER

iPod/USB

CD

Bluetooth

ONLINE MUSIC

PHONO ECO

INTERNET RADIO

Bluetooth

Music files stored on Bluetooth devices such as smartphones, digital music players, etc. can be enjoyed on this unit by pairing and connecting this unit with the Bluetooth device. Communication is possible up to a range of about 32.8 ft/10 m.
NOTE 0 To play back music from a Bluetooth device, the Bluetooth device needs to
support the A2DP profile.

ui ENTER

CH / PAGE

MUTE

VOLUME

INFO

OPTION

OPTION

BACK

ENTER

BACK

SETUP

TUNE -

TUNE +

SMART SELECT
1234

SOUND MODE MOVIE MUSIC GAME

PURE

1/3 8 9

.
Front panel

Display

Rear panel

91

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Playing music from Bluetooth device
In order to enjoy music from a Bluetooth device on this unit, the Bluetooth device must first be paired with this unit. Once the Bluetooth device has been paired, it does not need to be paired again.
1 Prepare for playback. A Connect the supplied external antennas for Bluetooth/wireless connectivity to the Bluetooth/wireless LAN antenna connectors on the rear panel. (v p. 21) B Press POWER X to turn on power to the unit.
2 Press Bluetooth to switch the input source to "Bluetooth".
Bluetooth
Pairing Mode Turn on Bluetooth from your mobile device's settings menu, then select "Marantz SR6010" when it appears in the device list.
Cancel

3 Activate the Bluetooth settings on your mobile device.
4 Select this unit when its name appears in the list of devices displayed on the screen of the Bluetooth device. Connect to the Bluetooth device while "Pairing" is being displayed on the display of the unit. Perform the connection with the Bluetooth device close to the unit (about 3.3 ft/1 m).
5 When a number appears on the display of this unit, check that it is the same number as that shown on the screen of the Bluetooth device and then select "Pair" for both the Bluetooth device and the unit. At the end of the pairing, the device name appears on the display of this unit.
6 Play music using any app on your Bluetooth device. 0 The Bluetooth device can also be operated with the remote control of this unit. 0 The next time the input source is switched to Bluetooth, this unit automatically connects to the last Bluetooth device that was connected.

.
When using for the first time, the unit will go into the pairing mode automatically and "Pairing..." will appear on the display of the unit.

0 Enter "0000" when the password is requested on the screen of the Bluetooth device.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

92

Remote

Index

Contents Operation buttons 1/3 8 9
ENTER
u i

Connections

Playback

Function Playback / Pause Skip to previous track / Skip to next track (Press and hold) Fast-reverse / Fastforward Playback / Pause (Press and hold) Stop Skip to previous track / Skip to next track (Press and hold) Fast-reverse / Fastforward

0 Press STATUS on this unit during playback to switch the display between Title name, Artist name, Album name, etc.
0 English letters, numbers and certain symbols are displayed. Incompatible characters are displayed as "." (period).

Settings

Tips

Appendix

NOTE
0 To operate the Bluetooth device with the remote control of this unit, the Bluetooth device needs to support the AVRCP profile.
0 The remote control of this unit is not guaranteed to work with all Bluetooth devices. 0 Depending on the type of Bluetooth device, this unit outputs audio that is coupled
to the volume setting on the Bluetooth device.
o Operations accessible through the option menu
0 "Pairing with other Bluetooth devices" (v p. 94) 0 "Performing repeat playback" (v p. 127) 0 "Performing random playback" (v p. 127) 0 "Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source
(Channel Level Adjust)" (v p. 132) 0 "Adjusting the tone (Tone)" (v p. 133) 0 "Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video
Select)" (v p. 134) 0 "Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)" (v p. 136)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

93

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Pairing with other Bluetooth devices
Pair a Bluetooth device with this unit.
1 Activate the Bluetooth settings on your mobile device. 2 Press OPTION when the input source is "Bluetooth".
The option menu screen is displayed.
3 Use ui to select "Pairing Mode", then press ENTER. The device will go into the pairing mode.
4 Select this unit when its name appears in the list of devices displayed on the screen of the Bluetooth device.
5 When a number appears on the display of this unit, check that it is the same number as that shown on the screen of the Bluetooth device and then select "Pair" for both the Bluetooth device and the unit. At the end of the pairing, the device name appears on the display of this unit.

0 This unit can be paired with a maximum of 8 Bluetooth devices. When a 9th Bluetooth device is paired, it will be registered in place of the oldest registered device.
0 Enter "0000" when the password is requested on the screen of the Bluetooth device.
0 Press and hold the Bluetooth on the remote control for at least 3 seconds to go into pairing mode.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

94

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Reconnecting to this unit from a Bluetooth device
After pairing is completed, the Bluetooth device can be connected without performing any operations on this unit. This operation also needs to be performed when switching the Bluetooth device for playback.
1 If a Bluetooth device is currently connected, deactivate the Bluetooth setting of that device to disconnect it.
2 Activate the Bluetooth setting of the Bluetooth device to be connected.
3 Select this unit from the Bluetooth device list on your Bluetooth device.
4 Play music using any app on your Bluetooth device.

0 When the power of this unit is turned on, the input source will be automatically switched to "Bluetooth" if a Bluetooth device is connected.
0 When the "Network Control" setting of this unit is set to "Always On" and a Bluetooth device is connected with the unit in the standby state, the power of the unit will be turned on automatically. (v p. 238)

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

95

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Listening to FM/AM broadcasts

CH/PAGE df
uio p ENTER
BACK

ZONE SELECT

POWER

MAIN ZONE 2 SLEEP

CBL /SAT

DVD

Blu-ray

GAME

AUX1

TV AUDIO

AUX2

MEDIA PLAYER TUNER

iPod/USB

CD

Bluetooth

ONLINE MUSIC

PHONO ECO

INTERNET RADIO

CH / PAGE

MUTE

VOLUME

INFO

OPTION

ENTER

BACK

SETUP

TUNER OPTION

TUNE -

TUNE +

SMART SELECT
1234

SOUND MODE MOVIE MUSIC GAME

PURE

TUNE +, ­

Settings

Tips

Appendix

You can use the built-in tuner of this unit to listen to FM broadcasts and AM broadcasts. Make sure the FM antenna and AM loop antenna are connected to this unit first.

.
Front panel

Display

Rear panel

96

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Listening to FM/AM broadcasts

1 Connect the antenna. ("Connecting an FM/AM antenna" (v p. 73))
2 Press TUNER to switch the input source to "Tuner".
G TV screen H

Tuner CH 1

FM 92.10MHz

STEREO AUTO
Now Playing

Tune

Preset

OPTION Option

.
G Display of this unit H

.
3 Press OPTION. The option menu screen is displayed.
4 Use ui to select "FM/AM", then press ENTER. This displays the reception band input screen.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

5 Use o p to select "FM" or "AM", then press ENTER.

FM:

When listening to an FM broadcast.

AM:

When listening to an AM broadcast.

6 Press TUNE + or TUNE - to select the station you want listen to.
Scanning is performed until it finds an available radio station. When it finds a radio station, it stops the scan automatically and tunes in.

0 The modes for receiving FM broadcasts consists of "Auto" mode that automatically searches available broadcast stations and "Manual" mode that lets you tune in using buttons to change the frequency. The default setting is "Auto". You can also use "Direct Tune" to tune in by entering the frequency directly.
In "Auto" mode, you cannot tune in to radio stations if the reception is not good. If this is the case, then use the "Manual" mode or "Direct Tune" mode to tune in.

Operation buttons
TUNE +, ­ CH/PAGE d f u i o p

Function Selects the radio station (up/down) Selects preset radio stations Selects the radio station (up/down) Selects preset radio stations

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

97

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Operations accessible through the option menu
0 "Tuning in by entering the frequency (Direct Tune)" (v p. 98) 0 "Changing the tune mode (Tune Mode)" (v p. 99) 0 "Tuning in to stations and presetting them automatically (Auto Preset
Memory)" (v p. 99) 0 "Presetting the current broadcast station (Preset
Memory)" (v p. 100) 0 "Specify a name for the preset broadcast station (Preset
Name)" (v p. 101) 0 "Skipping preset broadcast stations (Preset Skip)" (v p. 102) 0 "Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source
(Channel Level Adjust)" (v p. 132) 0 "Adjusting the tone (Tone)" (v p. 133) 0 "Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video
Select)" (v p. 134) 0 "Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)" (v p. 136)

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Tuning in by entering the frequency (Direct Tune)
You can enter the receiving frequency directly to tune in.
1 Press OPTION when the input source is "Tuner". The option menu screen is displayed.
2 Use ui to select "Direct Tune", then press ENTER. The screen that lets you enter the frequency is displayed.
3 Use ui to select the number, then press p. 0 If o is pressed, the immediately preceding input is cancelled.
4 Repeat step 3 and enter the frequency of the radio station you want to hear.
5 When setting is completed, press ENTER. The preset frequency is tuned in.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

98

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Changing the tune mode (Tune Mode)

You can change the mode for tuning into FM and AM broadcasts. If you cannot tune in automatically with "Auto" mode, change the mode to "Manual" and tune in manually.
1 Press OPTION when the input source is "Tuner". The option menu screen is displayed.
2 Use ui to select "Tune Mode", then press ENTER. 3 Use o p to select the tune mode, then press ENTER.

Auto: Manual:

Automatically search for and tune to a receivable radio station.
Manually change the frequency one step at a time each time the button is pressed.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Tuning in to stations and presetting them automatically (Auto Preset Memory)
A maximum of 56 radio stations can be automatically preset.
1 Press OPTION when the input source is "Tuner". The option menu screen is displayed.
2 Use ui to select "Auto Preset Memory", then press ENTER.
3 Press ENTER. The unit starts to tune in to radio stations automatically and preset them. 0 When presetting is completed, "Completed" is displayed for about 5 seconds and the option menu screen turns off.

0 The preset memory is overwritten.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

99

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Presetting the current broadcast station (Preset Memory)
Your favorite broadcast stations can be preset so that you can tune them in easily. Up to 56 stations can be preset.
1 Tune in the broadcast station you want to preset. ("Listening to FM/AM broadcasts" (v p. 97))
2 Press OPTION. The option menu screen is displayed.
3 Use ui to select "Preset Memory", then press ENTER. The list of already preset channels is displayed.
4 Use ui to select the channel you want to preset, then press ENTER. The current broadcast station that is preset. 0 To preset other stations, repeat steps 1 to 4.

Channel 1 ­ 8 9 ­ 16
17 ­ 24 25 ­ 32 33 ­ 40 41 ­ 48 49 ­ 56

Default settings
92.10 / 92.30 / 92.50 / 92.70 / 93.10 / 93.50 / 93.70 / 94.10 MHz
94.30 / 94.50 / 94.70 / 94.90 / 95.10 / 95.30 / 95.50 / 95.70 MHz
98.10 / 98.30 / 98.50 / 98.70 / 98.90 / 99.10 / 100.10 / 100.30 MHz
100.50 / 100.70 / 100.90 / 101.10 / 101.30 / 101.50 / 101.70 / 101.90 MHz
103.10 / 103.30 / 103.50 / 103.70 / 103.90 / 104.10 / 104.30 / 104.50 MHz
104.70 / 104.90 / 105.10 / 105.30 / 105.50 / 105.70 / 105.90 / 106.10 MHz
106.30 / 106.50 / 106.70 / 106.90 / 107.10 / 107.30 / 107.50 / 107.90 MHz

Listening to preset stations
1 Use CH/PAGE df to select the desired preset channel.

0 You can also select preset broadcast stations by pressing TUNER PRESET CH + or TUNER PRESET CH - on the main unit.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

100

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Specify a name for the preset broadcast station (Preset Name)
You can set the name to the preset broadcast station or change it. Up to eight characters can be input.
1 Press OPTION when the input source is "Tuner". The option menu screen is displayed.
2 Use ui to select "Preset Name", then press ENTER. The Preset Name screen is displayed.
3 Use o p to select the group of the broadcast station you want to name.
4 Use ui to select the broadcast station you want to name, then press ENTER.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

5 Use ui to select a name label, then press ENTER. The screen that lets you edit the Preset Name is displayed. 0 If you select "Set Defaults", then the unit returns to displaying the frequency.
6 Enter the characters, then press "OK". 0 For character input, see "Using the keyboard screen" (v p. 172).
7 Press OPTION to return to the previous screen.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

101

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Skipping preset broadcast stations (Preset Skip)
Perform auto preset memory to save all the broadcasting stations that can be received in the memory. Selecting a broadcast station becomes easier by skipping unnecessary memories.
1 Press OPTION when the input source is "Tuner". The option menu screen is displayed.
2 Use ui to select "Preset Skip", then press ENTER. The "Preset Skip" screen is displayed.
3 n To set the stations you want to skip by groups A Use o p to select the group of broadcast stations you want to skip. B Press u to select "Set No.z ­ z to Skip", then press ENTER. Skip all the broadcast stations that are included in the selected group "z-z". (z is the selected group number.)

n To set the stations you want to skip by stations
A Use o p to select the group of broadcast stations you want to skip.
B Use ui to select the broadcast station you want to skip. C Use o p to select "Skip".
The station you selected is not displayed.
4 Press OPTION to return to the previous screen.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

102

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Cancelling Preset Skip
1 While the "Preset Skip" screen is displayed, use o p to select a group containing a broadcast station to cancel the skip for.
2 Use ui to select a broadcast station to cancel the skip for.
3 Use o p to select "On". The skip is cancelled.
NOTE 0 "Preset Skip" cannot be cancelled for groups.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

103

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Listening to Internet Radio

ONLINE MUSIC CH/PAGE df
uio p ENTER
BACK 1/3

ZONE SELECT MAIN ZONE 2

POWER SLEEP

CBL /SAT

DVD

Blu-ray

GAME

AUX1

TV AUDIO

AUX2

MEDIA PLAYER TUNER

iPod/USB

CD

Bluetooth

ONLINE MUSIC

PHONO ECO

INTERNET RADIO

CH / PAGE

MUTE

VOLUME

INFO

OPTION

ENTER

BACK

SETUP

INTERNET RADIO OPTION

TUNE -

TUNE +

SMART SELECT
1234

SOUND MODE MOVIE MUSIC GAME

PURE

Settings

Tips

Appendix

0 Internet Radio refers to radio broadcasts distributed over the Internet. Internet Radio stations from around the world can be received.
0 The Internet radio station list on this unit the database service provided by vTuner radio station.
0 The audio format types and specifications supported by this unit for playback are as follows. See "Playing back Internet Radio" (v p. 285) for details.
0 WMA 0 MP3 0 MPEG-4 AAC

.
Front panel

Display

Rear panel

104

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Listening to Internet Radio
1 Prepare for playback. 0 Check the network environment, then turn on this unit's power. ("Connecting to a home network (LAN)" (v p. 75))
2 Press ONLINE MUSIC. 0 You can also press INTERNET RADIO to select the input source "Internet Radio" directly.
3 Use uio p to select "Internet Radio", then press ENTER.

Online Music

Favorites

Internet Radio

Media Server

.

4 Use ui to select the search method for the radio station that you wish to playback and then press ENTER.

Name of country: Search Stations : Search Podcasts : Recommended Stations :
radiomarantz.com :
Recently Played :
Search by Keyword:

Select the various regions. Displays typical Internet Radio stations.
Displays all Internet Radio stations that this unit can tune in to.
Displays Internet Radio stations in the podcasts that this unit can tune in to.
Displays recommended Internet Radio stations.
Displays Internet Radio stations added to favorites in vTuner. For instructions on how to add to favorites in vTuner, see "Using vTuner to add Internet Radio stations to favorites" (v p. 107).
Displays recently played Internet Radio stations. Up to 20 stations can be stored in "Recently Played".
Displays Internet Radio stations searched by keyword. For character input, see "Using the keyboard screen" (v p. 172).

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

105

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

5 Use ui p to select the station, then press ENTER. Playback starts once buffering reaches "100%".

Operation buttons 1/3 ENTER
CH/PAGE d f

Function Playback / Stop (Press and hold) Stop Switch to the previous page/next page in the list display

0 The display switches between track title and radio station name etc. each time the main unit's STATUS is pressed.
0 Any characters that cannot be displayed are replaced with "." (period).
NOTE 0 The radio station database service may be suspended or be otherwise unavailable
without notice.

Playing the last played Internet Radio station
1 Press INTERNET RADIO. The source switches to "Internet Radio" and the last played radio station plays.
o Operations accessible through the option menu
0 "Searching content with keywords (Text Search)" (v p. 129) 0 "Playing back music and a favorite picture at the same time
(Slideshow)" (v p. 130) 0 "Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source
(Channel Level Adjust)" (v p. 132) 0 "Adjusting the tone (Tone)" (v p. 133) 0 "Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video
Select)" (v p. 134) 0 "Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)" (v p. 136)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

106

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Using vTuner to add Internet Radio stations to favorites
There are many Internet Radio stations in the world, and this unit can tune into these stations. But finding the radio station you want to hear may be difficult, because there are too many stations. If this is the case, then please use vTuner, an Internet Radio station search website specifically designed for this unit. You can use your PC to search Internet Radio stations and add them as your favorites. This unit can play radio stations added to vTuner.
1 Check the MAC address of this unit. ("Information" (v p. 232)) 0 The MAC address is necessary when you create an account for vTuner.
2 Use your PC to access the vTuner website (http://www.radiomarantz.com).
3 Enter the MAC address of this unit, then click "Go".

4 Enter your E-mail address and a password of your choice.
5 Select the search criteria (genre, region, language, etc.) of your choice. 0 You can also enter a keyword to search for a station you want to hear.
6 Select the radio station of your choice from the list, and then click the Add to Favorites icon.
7 Enter the name of the favorite group, then click "Go". A new favorite group that includes the selected radio station is created. 0 Internet Radio stations added to favorites in vTuner can be played from "radiomarantz.com" with this unit. (v p. 105)
0 You can also add a radio station that is not in the vTuner list.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

107

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Playing back files stored on a PC and NAS

ONLINE MUSIC CH/PAGE df
uio p ENTER
BACK

ZONE SELECT MAIN ZONE 2

POWER SLEEP

CBL /SAT

DVD

Blu-ray

GAME

AUX1

TV AUDIO

AUX2

MEDIA PLAYER TUNER

iPod/USB

CD

Bluetooth

ONLINE MUSIC

PHONO ECO

INTERNET RADIO

CH / PAGE

MUTE

VOLUME

INFO

OPTION

ENTER

BACK

SETUP

TUNE -

TUNE +

SMART SELECT
1234

SOUND MODE MOVIE MUSIC GAME

PURE

OPTION
1/3 8 9

0 This unit can play back music files and playlists (m3u, wpl) stored on a PC and on Network Attached Storage (NAS) that supports DLNA.
0 The network audio playback function of this unit connects to the server using technologies shown below. Windows Media Player Network Sharing Service
0 The audio/video format types and specifications supported by this unit for playback are as follows. For details, see "Playing back a file saved on a PC or NAS" (v p. 284).
0 WMA 0 MP3 0 WAV 0 MPEG-4 AAC 0 FLAC 0 ALAC 0 AIFF 0 DSD 0 JPEG

.
Front panel

Display

Rear panel

108

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Applying media sharing settings

Here, we apply the settings to share music files stored on a PC and NAS on the network.

If you are using a Media Server, be sure to apply this setting first.

.
o When using Windows Media Player 12

o When using Windows Media Player 11

(Windows 7 / Windows 8)
1 Start up Windows Media Player 12 on the PC. 2 Select "More streaming options..." in the "Stream". 3 Select "Allowed" in the "Marantz SR6010" drop-down
list.
4 Select "Allowed" in the drop-down list for "Media programs on this PC and remote connections...".

1 Start up Windows Media Player 11 on the PC. 2 Select "Media Sharing" in the "Library". 3 Click the "Share my media" check box, select "Marantz
SR6010", and then click "Allow".
4 As you did in step 3, select the icon of the device (other PCs and mobile devices) you want to use as a media controller, and then click "Allow".

5 Follow the screen instructions to end the setting.

5 Click "OK" to finish.

o Sharing media stored in NAS
Change settings on the NAS to allow this unit and other devices (PCs and mobile devices) used as media controllers to access the NAS. For details, see the owner's manual that came with the NAS.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

109

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Playing back files stored on a PC and NAS
Use this procedure to play music files, image files or playlists.
1 Prepare for playback. A Check the network environment, then turn on this unit's power. ("Connecting to a home network (LAN)" (v p. 75)) B Prepare the computer. (vComputer's operating instructions)
2 Press ONLINE MUSIC. 3 Use uio p to select "Media Server", then press
ENTER.

Online Music

Favorites

Internet Radio

Media Server

Settings

Tips

Appendix

4 Use ui to select the server including the file to be played, then press ENTER.
5 Use iu p to select the file, then press ENTER. Playback starts once buffering reaches "100%".

Operation buttons 1/3 8 9
ENTER
u i CH/PAGE d f

Function Playback / Pause Skip to previous track / Skip to next track (Press and hold) Fast-reverse / Fastforward Playback / Pause (Press and hold) Stop Skip to previous track / Skip to next track (Press and hold) Fast-reverse / Fastforward Switch to the previous page/next page in the list display

.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

110

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

0 The display switches between track title, artist name, and album title each time the main unit's STATUS is pressed.
0 When a WMA (Windows Media Audio), MP3 or MPEG-4 AAC file includes album art data, the album art can be displayed while the music files are playing.
0 If you use Ver.11 or later of Windows Media Player, the album art for WMA files can be displayed.
0 WMA Lossless files can be played when using a server supporting transcoding, such as Windows Media Player (Ver.11 or later).
0 This unit plays back picture (JPEG) files in the order in which they are stored in the folder.
NOTE
0 When playing back music files with your PC or NAS connected through wireless LAN, audio may be interrupted depending on your wireless LAN environment. In this case, connect using a wired LAN.
0 Depending on the size of the still picture (JPEG) file, some time may be required for the file to be displayed.
0 The order in which the tracks/files are displayed depends on the server specifications. If the tracks/files are not displayed in alphabetical order due to the server specifications, searching by the first letter may not work properly.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Operations accessible through the option menu
0 "Performing repeat playback" (v p. 127) 0 "Performing random playback" (v p. 127) 0 "Searching content with keywords (Text Search)" (v p. 129)
0 "Playing back music and a favorite picture at the same time (Slideshow)" (v p. 130)
0 "Setting the Slideshow Interval" (v p. 131)
0 "Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source (Channel Level Adjust)" (v p. 132)
0 "Adjusting the tone (Tone)" (v p. 133)
0 "Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video Select)" (v p. 134)
0 "Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment (Picture Mode)" (v p. 135)
0 "Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)" (v p. 136)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

111

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Listening to Pandora®

Playback

ONLINE MUSIC CH/PAGE df
uio p ENTER
BACK

ZONE SELECT

POWER

MAIN ZONE 2 SLEEP

CBL /SAT

DVD

GAME

AUX1

TV AUDIO

AUX2

Blu-ray MEDIA PLAYER TUNER

iPod/USB

CD

Bluetooth

ONLINE MUSIC

PHONO ECO

INTERNET RADIO

CH / PAGE

MUTE

VOLUME

INFO

OPTION

ENTER

BACK

SETUP

TUNE -

TUNE +

SMART SELECT
1234

SOUND MODE MOVIE MUSIC GAME

PURE

OPTION
1/3 9

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Pandora is an automated music recommendation and Internet Radio service created by the Music Genome Project.
To listen to Pandora you will need a free Pandora account.
If you do not have a Pandora account, you can create one at www.pandora.com or from the Pandora smartphone application.
Playback of Pandora in this unit requires the Pandora account to be linked to the unit. Therefore, access http://www.pandora.com/marantz from your personal computer and perform the linkage.

.
Front panel

Display

Rear panel

112

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Listening to Pandora®
1 Prepare for playback. 0 Check the network environment, then turn on this unit's power. ("Connecting to a home network (LAN)" (v p. 75))
2 Press ONLINE MUSIC. 3 Use uio p to select "Pandora", then press ENTER.

Online Music

Favorites

Internet Radio

Media Server

.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

4 If you have a Pandora account, use ui to select "I have a Pandora account", then press ENTER.
0 If you do not have a Pandora account, to select "I am to new to Pandora", then press ENTER. The URL of Pandora and activation code are displayed. Access the Pandora web page from your PC and register the displayed activation code and account information. Then press ENTER.

Pandora

I have a Pandora account I am to new to Pandora
Please go to http://www.pandora.com/NBSBOU[ and follow the instructions there to create a new account.
Your activation code is : zzzzzz

BACK Cancel

Continue

This is an identification code required to register your purchased product to the Pandora service.This code is used to obtain your account.
.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

113

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

5 Input "Email address" and "Password". 0 For character input, see "Using the keyboard screen" (v p. 172). 0 Press BACK to cancel the input. When "Cancel input?" is displayed, select "Yes", then press ENTER.
6 After inputting the "Email address" and "Password", select "OK", then press ENTER. If the "Email address" and "Password" match, the top menu for Pandora is displayed.

My Station
New Station Shuffle Music1 Radio Sign Out

[1/4]

OPTION Option
.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

114

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Creating a new station
You can create up to 100 radio stations.
1 Use ui to select "New Station", then press ENTER. 2 Input a track or artist name, then press "OK".
0 For character input, see "Using the keyboard screen" (v p. 172).
3 Use ui to select "Search by Artist" or "Search by Track", then press ENTER. You can search and display a list by track or artist.
4 Use ui, select a file from the list, press ENTER. New station is created.

0 Your new station will play music with similar qualities to the artist or track you entered.

Settings
Operation buttons 1/3 9 ENTER i CH/PAGE d f

Tips

Appendix

Function Playback / Pause Skip to next track Playback / Pause (Press and hold) Stop Skip to next track Switch to the previous page/next page in the list display

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

115

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Listening to an existing station
1 Use ui and select the radio station that you want to listen to, then press ENTER.

0 You can skip up to 6 tracks that are being played back within 1 hour.

Listening to created radio stations at random
1 Use ui to select "Shuffle", then press ENTER. Created radio stations are selected at random, and tracks are streamed.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

116

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Giving feedback and managing stations

You can personalize your stations by providing feedback.

1 Press p while a track is playing. The Pandora menu screen is displayed.

I like this track :
I don't like this track : Why is this track playing? : Create station :

Press when you like the track that is being played. Playback a favorite track. Display the E (Thumbs up) icon.
Press when you don't like the track that is being played. Delete that track from the radio station. Display the D (Thumbs down) icon.
Displays the reason why Pandora selected this track.
Creates a station for the track or artist being played.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Bookmark this track :
I'm tired of this track : Delete this station :

Bookmarks the artist currently being played. You can check on a computer or iPhone etc. For details, see the Pandora web page.
Press when you don't like the track that is being played. The track will not be played for 1 month.
Press when you want to delete the station that is being played.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

117

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Sign Out
Disassociate this unit from your Pandora account.
1 Use ui to select "Sign Out", then press ENTER. 2 When the popup menu appears, use o p to select
"Yes", then press ENTER.
o Operations accessible through the option menu
0 "Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source (Channel Level Adjust)" (v p. 132)
0 "Adjusting the tone (Tone)" (v p. 133) 0 "Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video
Select)" (v p. 134) 0 "Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment (Picture
Mode)" (v p. 135) 0 "Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)" (v p. 136)

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

118

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Listening to SiriusXM Internet Radio

ONLINE MUSIC CH/PAGE df
uio p ENTER
BACK

ZONE SELECT

POWER

MAIN ZONE 2 SLEEP

CBL /SAT

DVD

GAME

AUX1

TV AUDIO

AUX2

Blu-ray MEDIA PLAYER TUNER

iPod/USB

CD

Bluetooth

ONLINE MUSIC

PHONO ECO

INTERNET RADIO

CH / PAGE

MUTE

VOLUME

INFO

OPTION

ENTER

BACK

SETUP

OPTION

TUNE -

TUNE +

SMART SELECT
1234

SOUND MODE MOVIE MUSIC GAME

PURE

1/3

You can access SiriusXM to enjoy access to a wide range of unique content.
An All Access package lets you listen to SiriusXM on your computer, smartphone, tablet or Lynx Portable.
For details, see the SiriusXM homepage. http://www.siriusxm.com

.
Front panel

Display

Rear panel

119

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Listening to SiriusXM Internet Radio
Over 155 channels commercial-free music, plus play-by-play sports, exclusive talk, comedy and entertainment.
1 Prepare for playback. A Check the network environment, then turn on this unit's power. ("Connecting to a home network (LAN)" (v p. 75)) B Access the following website from your PC and obtain a SiriusXM account. http://www.siriusxm.com 0 If you already have SiriusXM Internet Radio credentials, select "Sign in" in step 4 and enter your SiriusXM username and password. If you need to setup a SiriusXM account or Internet Radio credentials, visit http://care.siriusxm.com
2 Press ONLINE MUSIC.

3 Use uio p to select "SiriusXM", then press ENTER.

Online Music
Favorites

Internet Radio

Media Server

.
4 Select "Sign in" and then press ENTER. 5 Input "Username" and "Password".
0 For character input, see "Using the keyboard screen" (v p. 172).
6 Select the "Sign in", then press ENTER. The top menu of SiriusXM is displayed.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

120

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

7 Use ui to select the genre, then press ENTER. 8 Use ui to select the file, then press ENTER.
The selected file is displayed.

Operation buttons 1/3 ENTER
CH/PAGE d f

Function Playback / Stop Playback (Press and hold) Stop Switch to the previous page/next page in the list display

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Sign Out
Disassociate this unit from your SiriusXM account.
1 Use ui to select "Sign Out", then press ENTER. 2 When the popup menu appears, use o p to select
"Yes", then press ENTER.

o Operations accessible through the option menu
0 "Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source (Channel Level Adjust)" (v p. 132)
0 "Adjusting the tone (Tone)" (v p. 133) 0 "Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video
Select)" (v p. 134) 0 "Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment (Picture
Mode)" (v p. 135) 0 "Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)" (v p. 136)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

121

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

AirPlay function
Music files stored on your iPhone, iPod touch, iPad or iTunes can be played on this unit via the network.

0 X is displayed on the menu screen while AirPlay is being operated. 0 Source input will be switched to "Online Music" when AirPlay playback is started. 0 You can stop AirPlay playback by pressing o or choosing other input source. 0 To see song and artist names together, press STATUS on the main unit. 0 For information about how to use iTunes, also see the Help for iTunes. 0 The screen may differ depending on the OS and software versions.

Settings
PC

.

Tips
Router

Appendix
This unit

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

122

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Playing songs from your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad
If you update your "iPhone/iPod touch/iPad" to iOS 4.2.1 or later, you can stream music stored in your "iPhone/iPod touch/iPad" directly to this unit.
1 Connect your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad Wi-Fi to the same network as this unit. 0 For details, see your device's manual.
2 Play the song on your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad. ' is displayed on the iPhone, iPod touch or iPad screen.
3 Tap the AirPlay icon '.

Playing iTunes music with this unit
1 Install iTunes 10, or later, on a Mac or Windows PC that is connected to the same network as this unit.
2 Turn this unit ON. Set "Network Control" to "Always On" for this unit. (v p. 238)
NOTE 0 When "Network Control" is set to "Always On", the unit consumes more
standby power.
3 Start iTunes and click the AirPlay icon ' to select the main unit.

AirDrop
.

AirPlay

4 Select the speaker (devices) you want to use.

.
4 Choose a song and click play in iTunes. The music will stream to this unit.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

123

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Selecting multiple speakers (devices)
It is possible to play iTunes songs on your home's AirPlay compatible speakers (devices) other than those of this unit.
1 Click the AirPlay icon ' and select "Multiple". 2 Check the speakers you want to use.
NOTE 0 In playback using the AirPlay function, the sound is output at the iPhone, iPod
touch, iPad or iTunes volume setting level. You should turn down the iPhone, iPod touch, iPad or iTunes volume prior to playback and then adjust it to a suitable level.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Perform iTunes playback operations with the remote control unit of this unit
With this unit's remote control unit, you can perform iTunes song play, pause, and auto search (cue) operations.
1 Select the "Edit" - "Preferences..." in the iTunes menu. 2 Select "Devices" in the iTunes setting window. 3 Check "Allow iTunes audio control from remote
speakers", and then click "OK".

0 This does not need to be set if using version 12 or later of iTunes.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

124

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Spotify Connect function
Spotify is the world's most popular streaming service. If you subscribe to Spotify Premium, you can control your new speaker with your phone or tablet. Because Spotify is built-in to your speaker, you can still take calls or use other apps - the music never stops. For information on how to set up and use Spotify Connect please visit www.spotify.com/connect
Spotify server

This unit

Spotify App

Playing Spotify music with this unit
Download the "Spotify App" onto your Android or iOS device beforehand. To play a Spotify track in this unit, you need to register in the Spotify premium account first.
1 Connect the Wi-Fi settings of the iOS or Android device in the same network as this unit.
2 Launch the Spotify App. 3 Play back the Spotify track. 4 Tap the F icon to select the unit.
The music will stream to this unit.

Audio streaming/
control

Control

.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

125

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Convenience functions

Playback

MAIN
ONLINE MUSIC
uio p ENTER

ZONE SELECT MAIN ZONE 2

POWER SLEEP

CBL /SAT

DVD

Blu-ray

GAME

AUX1

TV AUDIO

AUX2

MEDIA PLAYER TUNER

iPod/USB

CD

Bluetooth

ONLINE MUSIC

PHONO ECO

INTERNET RADIO

CH / PAGE

MUTE

VOLUME

INFO

OPTION

ENTER

BACK

SETUP

OPTION

TUNE -

TUNE +

SMART SELECT
1234

SOUND MODE MOVIE MUSIC GAME

PURE

Settings

Tips

Appendix

0 This section explains how to use convenient functions that can be used for each input source.
0 These functions can only be set in the MAIN ZONE.

.
Front panel

Display

Rear panel

126

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Performing repeat playback

Performing random playback

n Supported input sources: USB / Media Server / Bluetooth

1 While content is playing, press OPTION. The option menu screen is displayed.
2 Use ui to select "Repeat", then press ENTER. 3 Use o p to select repeat playback mode.

Off (Default): One:
All:

Repeat playback mode is canceled.
A file being played is played repeatedly. All files in the folder currently being played are played repeatedly.

4 Press ENTER. The display returns to the playback screen.

0 This cannot be set up if the Bluetooth device does not support the repeat setting under the AVRCP profile.
0 "Repeat" settings are stored for each input source.

n Supported input sources : USB / Media Server / Bluetooth

1 While content is playing, press OPTION. The option menu screen is displayed.
2 Use ui to select "Random", then press ENTER. 3 Use o p to select random playback mode.

Off (Default):
On:

Disable random playback.
Randomly play back all tracks in the current playback folder.

4 Press ENTER. The display returns to the playback screen.

0 During random playback, each time playback of a track is completed, another track is randomly selected for playback from tracks in the folder. Therefore, it's possible that you may hear a track played back more than once during random playback.
0 This cannot be set up if the Bluetooth device does not support the random setting under the AVRCP profile.
0 "Random" settings are stored for each input source.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

127

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Registering to Favorites
You can register a total of 100 favorites.
n Supported input sources : Internet Radio / Media Server / Pandora / SiriusXM
1 While content is playing, press OPTION. The option menu screen is displayed.
2 Use ui to select "Save to Favorites", then press ENTER. "Favorite added" is displayed, and the current content is added to favorites. 0 The display returns to the playback screen when the procedure is completed.

Playing back content added to the "Save to Favorites"
1 Press ONLINE MUSIC. 2 Use uio p to select "Favorites", then press ENTER.

Online Music
Favorites

Internet Radio

Media Server

.
3 Use ui to select the content you want to play, then press ENTER. Playback starts.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

128

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Deleting content added to favorites
1 Press ONLINE MUSIC. 2 Use uio p to select "Favorites", then press ENTER. 3 Use ui to select the content you want to delete from
favorites, then press OPTION. The option menu screen is displayed.
4 Use ui to select "Remove from Favorites", then press ENTER. "Favorite removed" is displayed, and the selected content is deleted from favorites. 0 The screen returns to the previous screen when the delete process is complete.

Searching content with keywords (Text Search)
n Supported input sources : USB / Internet Radio / Media Server
1 While the content is playing, press OPTION. The option menu screen is displayed.
2 Use ui to select "Text Search", then press ENTER. The keyboard input screen is displayed.
3 Enter the first character of the Internet Radio station or file you want to search for, and then press "OK". 0 For character input, see "Using the keyboard screen" (v p. 172).
4 Use ui to select the content you want to play, then press ENTER. Playback starts.

0 "Text Search" searches for Internet Radio stations or files that start with the entered first character from the displayed list.
NOTE 0 Text Search may not work for some lists.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

129

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Playing back music and a favorite picture at the same time (Slideshow)

n Supported input sources : USB

n Supported input sources : Internet Radio / Media Server

1 Play back a still picture. 0 Playing back still pictures stored on USB memory devices. (v p. 88)
2 Play back a music file. (v p. 88) 3 Press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
4 Use ui to select "Slideshow", then press ENTER. The option menu disappears, and the picture you were viewing is shown on the screen.

1 Play back a still picture. 0 Play back still pictures stored on Media Server. (v p. 108)
2 Play back a music file of Media Server or Internet Radio station. 0 "Listening to Internet Radio" (v p. 104) 0 "Playing back files stored on a PC and NAS" (v p. 108)
3 Press OPTION. The option menu screen is displayed.
4 Use ui to select "Slideshow", then press ENTER. The option menu disappears, and the picture you were viewing is shown on the screen.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

130

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Setting the Slideshow Interval
Set the playback interval when playing back a slideshow of still picture (JPEG) files stored on a USB memory device or media server.
n Supported input sources: USB / Media Server

1 While the list is displayed, press OPTION. The option menu screen is displayed.
2 Use ui to select "Slideshow Interval", then press ENTER.
3 Use o p to set the display time.

Off: 5s - 60s (Default: 5s):
4 Press ENTER.

The slide show is not played back.
Set the time for displaying a single picture when playing back images in the slide show.

0 The "Slideshow Interval" settings are reflected for all input sources.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

131

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source (Channel Level Adjust)
The volume of each channel can be changed while listening to music. You can set this for each input source.
1 Press OPTION. The option menu screen is displayed.
2 Use ui to select "Channel Level Adjust", then press ENTER. The "Channel Level Adjust" screen is displayed.
3 Use ui to select the channel that you wish to adjust. 4 Use o p to adjust the volume.
­12.0 dB ­ +12.0 dB (Default : 0.0 dB)
5 Use uio p to select "Exit", then press ENTER.

0 Select "Reset" and press ENTER if you want to restore the adjustment values of the various channels to "0.0 dB" (default).
0 Headphone volume can be adjusted when a headphone is connected. 0 "Channel Level Adjust" settings are stored for each input source. 0 You can only set this for speakers that output audio. In addition, you cannot set
this when in the menu "HDMI Audio Out" is set to "TV". (v p. 189)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

132

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Adjusting the tone (Tone)

Adjusts the tonal quality of the sound.
1 Press OPTION. The option menu screen is displayed.
2 Use ui to select "Tone", then press ENTER. The "Tone" screen is displayed.
3 Use o p to set the tone control function to on/off.

On:
Off (Default):

Allow tone adjustment (bass, treble). Playback without tone adjustment.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

4 Select "On" in step 3 and press i to select the sound range to be adjusted.

Bass: Treble:

Adjust bass. Adjust treble.

5 Use o p to adjust the tone, then press ENTER.

-6 dB ­ +6 dB (Default : 0 dB)

0 "Tone" settings are stored for each input source. 0 This cannot be set when the sound mode is set to "Direct" or "Pure Direct". 0 This item cannot be set when "Dynamic EQ" is set to "On". (v p. 181) 0 You cannot set this when no audio signal is input or in the menu "HDMI Audio Out"
is set to "TV". (v p. 189) 0 This cannot be set when the input mode is set to "7.1CH IN".

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

133

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video Select)

This unit can display video from a different source on TV during audio playback. You can set this for each input source.
n Supported input sources: iPod/USB / CDz / Tuner / Online Music / Bluetooth / Phono
z This cannot be set when any of the HDMI, component video or video connectors are assigned.
1 Press OPTION during audio playback. The option menu screen is displayed.
2 Use ui to select "Video Select", then press ENTER. 3 Use o p to select the Video Select mode.

Off (Default):
On:

Disable Video Select mode. Enable Video Select mode.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

4 If you selected "On" in step 3, press i and select "Source".
5 Use o p to select the input source for video you want to play back, then press ENTER.

0 "Video Select" settings are stored for each input source.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

134

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment (Picture Mode)
n Supported input sources : CBL/SAT / DVD / Blu-ray / Game / AUX1 / AUX2 / Media Player / iPod/USB / Online Music / CDz / TV Audioz
z You can set the picture mode when an HDMI, component video or video connector is assigned.
1 Press OPTION during video playback. The option menu screen is displayed.
2 Use ui to select "Picture Mode", then press ENTER.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

3 Use o p to select picture mode.

Off: Standard: Movie: Vivid: Streaming: ISF Day: ISF Night: Custom:

No picture quality adjustment is done with this unit.
The standard mode suited for most living room viewing environments.
A mode suited for watching movies in a dark room such as a theater room.
A mode that makes graphic images for games, etc. brighter and more vivid.
A mode suited for low bit rate video sources.
A mode suited for watching movies in a bright room during the day.
A mode suited for watching movies in a dark room at night.
Adjusts the picture quality manually.

4 Press ENTER.

0 "Picture Mode" settings are stored for each input source.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

135

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)
You can play back the music being played back in MAIN ZONE simultaneously in ZONE2 (separate room). It is useful when you want to enjoy the same music at the same time in multiple rooms during home party or when you want to play back the same BGM in the entire house.
1 Press OPTION. The option menu screen is displayed.
2 Use ui to select "All Zone Stereo", then press ENTER. 3 Select "Start", then press ENTER.
The input source for ZONE2 is switched to the same input source as for MAIN ZONE, and playback starts in the All Zone Stereo mode.

o Stopping the All Zone Stereo mode
1 During playback in All Zone Stereo mode, press OPTION. The option menu screen is displayed.
2 Use ui to select "All Zone Stereo", then press ENTER. 3 Select "Stop", then press ENTER.
0 The All Zone Stereo mode is canceled even when the power supply of the MAIN ZONE is turned off.
0 In the All Zone Stereo mode, only the "Multi Ch Stereo" and "Stereo" sound modes can be selected.
0 When "HDMI Audio Out" is set to "TV", the All Zone Stereo mode is not available. (v p. 189)
0 When "Input Mode" is set to other than "7.1CH IN", the All Zone Stereo mode is available. (v p. 204)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

136

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Selecting a sound mode

Playback

ZONE SELECT MAIN ZONE 2

POWER SLEEP

CBL /SAT

DVD

Blu-ray

GAME

AUX1

TV AUDIO

AUX2

MEDIA PLAYER TUNER

iPod/USB

CD

Bluetooth

ONLINE MUSIC

PHONO ECO

INTERNET RADIO

CH / PAGE

MUTE

VOLUME

INFO

OPTION

Settings

Tips

Appendix

This unit allows you to enjoy various kinds of surround and stereo playback modes. Disc formats such as Blu-ray Disc and DVD, as well as being supported by digital broadcasting, and even by streaming movies and music from internet-based subscription services. This unit supports playback of almost all of these multi-channel audio formats. It also supports surround playback of audio formats other than multi-channel audio such as 2-channel stereo audio.
0 For audio formats recorded on a disc, see the disc jacket or label.

MOVIE MUSIC
.
Front panel

ENTER

BACK

SETUP

TUNE -

TUNE +

SMART SELECT
1234

SOUND MODE MOVIE MUSIC GAME

PURE

Display

ui

PURE GAME

Rear panel

137

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Selecting a sound mode

1 Press MOVIE, MUSIC or GAME to select a sound mode.

MOVIE : MUSIC : GAME :

Switches to the sound mode suitable for enjoying movies and TV programs.
Switches to the sound mode suitable for enjoying music.
Switches to the sound mode suitable for enjoying games.

0 The MOVIE, MUSIC, or GAME button memorizes the last sound mode selected for its button. Pressing MOVIE, MUSIC, or GAME recalls the same sound mode as the one selected at the previous playback.
0 If the content played back does not support the previously selected sound mode, the most appropriate sound mode for the content is automatically selected.
0 You can also press SOUND MODE on the main unit to switch the sound mode.

o Switching the sound mode
0 Press MOVIE, MUSIC or GAME to display a list of the sound modes that can be selected. Each time you press MOVIE, MUSIC or GAME, the sound mode changes.
0 While the list is displayed, you can also use ui to select a sound mode.
0 Try out various sound modes and enjoy sound mode in your favorite mode. GExampleH When MOVIE is pressed
MOVIE SOUND Stereo
Dolby Surround DTS Neural:X
Multi Ch Stereo Virtual
.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

138

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Direct playback
Sound recorded in source is played as is.
1 Press PURE to select "Direct". Direct playback begins.

Playback

0 While DSD signals are played back, "DSD Direct" is displayed. 0 This can also be set by pressing PURE DIRECT on the main unit.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Pure Direct playback
This mode is for playback with higher sound quality than in Direct playback mode. This mode turns off the main unit display and analog video circuit. Doing so suppresses noise sources that affect sound quality.
1 Press PURE to select "Pure Direct". The display goes dark, and Pure Direct playback begins. The PURE DIRECT indicator lights.

0 In Direct and Pure Direct sound modes, the following items cannot be adjusted. 0 Tone (v p. 133) 0 M-DAX (v p. 177) 0 MultEQ® XT32 (v p. 180) 0 Dynamic EQ (v p. 181) 0 Dynamic Volume (v p. 182) 0 Graphic EQ (v p. 184)
0 This can also be set by pressing PURE DIRECT on the main unit.
NOTE
0 Video signals are only output when HDMI signals are played in the Pure Direct mode.
0 When the Pure Direct mode has been selected, the display turns off after about 5 seconds.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

139

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Auto surround playback
This mode detects the type of input digital signal, and automatically selects the corresponding mode for playback. Perform stereo playback when the input signal is PCM. When the input signal is Dolby Digital or DTS, the music is played back according to the respective channel number.
1 Press PURE to select "Auto". Auto surround playback begins.

0 This can also be set by pressing PURE DIRECT on the main unit.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

140

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Description of sound mode types

Dolby sound mode

Sound mode type

Description

Dolby Surround

This mode uses Dolby Surround Upmixer to extend various sources to natural and realistic multi channels for playback. Use ceiling speakers such as top middle speakers to realize a three-dimensional sound field.

Dolby Digital

This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in Dolby Digital.

Dolby TrueHD

This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in Dolby TrueHD.

Dolby Digital Plus

This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in Dolby Digital Plus.

Dolby Atmosz

This mode can be selected when playing back content encoded with Dolby Atmos. It decodes Dolby Atmos content and its positioning data in real time and outputs audio from the appropriate speakers, creating natural audio images regardless of the speaker layout. Use ceiling speakers and Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers to realize a three-dimensional sound field.

z Can be selected when using the Surround Back, Front Wide, Front Height, Top Front, Top Middle, Top Rear, Rear Height, Front Dolby, Surround Dolby or Back Dolby speakers.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

141

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

DTS sound mode

Sound mode type

Description

DTS Surround DTS ES Dscrt6.1z
DTS ES Mtrx6.1z

This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS.
This mode is suitable for playing discs recorded in DTS-ES. The surround back channel added using the discrete method is played as an independent channel. Since all channels are independent, the 360-degree spacial expressiveness and sound localization are enhanced.
This mode is suitable for playing discs recorded in DTS-ES. The surround back channel added to the surround-left and surround-right channels by a matrix encoder at software recording time is decoded by this unit's matrix decoder and played from each channel (surround left, surround right, surround back).

DTS 96/24

This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS 96/24.

DTS-HD

This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS-HD.

DTS Express

This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS Express.

DTS:X

This mode can be selected when playing back content encoded with DTS:X. It decodes DTS:X content and its positioning data in real time and outputs audio from the appropriate speakers, creating natural audio images regardless of the speaker layout. Use height speakers to realize a three-dimensional sound field.

DTS Neural:X

This mode uses DTS Neural:X Upmixer to extend various sources to natural and realistic multi channels for playback. Use height speakers such as front height speakers to realize a three-dimensional sound field.

z This can be selected when "Speaker Config." - "Surr. Back" is not set to "None". (v p. 223)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

142

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

PCM multi-channel sound mode

Sound mode type

Description

Multi Ch In

This mode can be selected when playing multi-channel PCM/DSD sources.

Audyssey DSX® sound mode

Sound mode type

Description

Audyssey DSX® (A-DSX)z This mode creates playback for the new channels (front wide or front height) in 5.1-channel systems. By adding front wide or front height channels, the surround sound effects sound become more three dimensional and realistic.

z This can be selected when a setting other than "None" is selected for "Front Height" or "Front Wide", and a setting other than "None" is selected for "Center" in "Speaker Config.". (v p. 222)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

143

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Original sound mode Sound mode type
Multi Ch Stereo Virtual
Auto sound mode Sound mode type
Auto

Description This mode is for enjoying stereo sound from all speakers. This mode lets you experience an expansive surround sound effect when playing back through just the front (L/R) speakers only, and when listening with stereo headphones.
Description In this mode, the type of digital signal input, such as Dolby Digital, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Atmos, DTS, DTS-HD, DTS:X, DTS-ES, PCM (multi-channel) is detected, and the playback mode switches automatically to the corresponding mode. If the input signal is analog or PCM (2-channel), stereo playback is used. For Dolby Digital or DTS, the music is played back according to the respective channel number.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

144

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Stereo sound mode Sound mode type
Stereo
Direct sound mode Sound mode type
Direct Pure Direct

Description This mode plays 2-channel stereo audio with no additional surround sound processing. 0 Sound is output from the front left and right speakers, and subwoofer if connected. 0 When multi-channel signals are inputted, they are mixed down to 2-channel audio and are played back with no
additional surround sound processing.
Description This mode plays back audio as recorded in the source. This mode plays back an even higher quality sound than the "Direct" mode. The following circuits are stopped in order to further improve sound quality. 0 Display indicator circuit of the main body (display will go off.) 0 The analog video input/output switcher and processor is disabled.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

145

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Sound mode that can be selected for each input signal
0 The following sound modes can be selected using the MOVIE, MUSIC and GAME buttons. 0 Adjust the sound field effect with the menu "Surround Parameter" to enjoy surround sound the way you like it. (v p. 174)

Input signal

Stereo

Sound mode

MOVIE button S

MUSIC button S

GAME button S

Dolby Surround

S

S

S

2-channel z1

DTS Neural:X z2

S

S

S

Multi Ch Stereo

S

S

S

Virtual

S

S

S

z1 2-channel also includes analog input. z2 This mode plays back 2-channel sources in 5.1, 7.1 or 9.1-channel playback. It cannot be selected when headphones are used or when the speaker configuration is front
speakers only.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

146

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Input signal Multi-channel z3

Stereo Dolby Digital

Sound mode

MOVIE button S S

MUSIC button S S

GAME button S S

Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital + Dolby Surround Dolby Digital A-DSX z4

S

S

S

S

S

S

Dolby TrueHD

S

S

S

Dolby TrueHD + Dolby Surroundz5

S

S

S

Dolby TrueHD

Dolby Atmosz6

S

S

S

Dolby TrueHD A-DSX z4

S

S

S

Dolby Digital Plus

S

S

S

Dolby Digital Plus + Dolby Surroundz5

S

S

S

Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby Atmosz6

S

S

S

Dolby Digital Plus A-DSX z4

S

S

S

Dolby Atmos

Dolby Atmos

S

S

S

DTS Surround

S

S

S

DTS ES Dscrt 6.1

S

S

S

DTS

DTS ES Mtrx 6.1 DTS 96/24

S

S

S

S

S

S

DTS + Neural:X

S

S

S

DTS Surround A-DSX z4

S

S

S

z3 The sound mode that can be selected differs depending on the audio format of the input signal and the number of channels. For details, see "Types of input signals, and corresponding sound modes" (v p. 291).
z4 These modes add new channels to 5.1-channel surround using Audyssey DSX® processing. (v p. 183) z5 This can be selected when the input signal does not contain Dolby Atmos. z6 This can be selected when the input signal contains Dolby Atmos.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

147

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Input signal DTS-HD/ DTS Express
DTS:X PCM multi-channel Multi-channel z3

Sound mode DTS-HD HI RES DTS-HD MSTR DTS-HD MSTR A-DSX z4 DTS Express DTS Express A-DSX z4 DTS-HD + Neural:X DTS-HD HI RES A-DSX z4 DTS:X DTS:X MSTR Multi Ch In Multi Ch In 7.1 Multi In + Dolby Surround Multi In A-DSX z4 Multi Ch In + Neural:X Multi Ch Stereo Virtual

MOVIE button S S S
S S
S S
S S S S S S
S S S

MUSIC button S S S
S S
S S
S S S S S S
S S S

GAME button S S S
S S
S S
S S S S S S
S S S

z3 The sound mode that can be selected differs depending on the audio format of the input signal and the number of channels. For details, see "Types of input signals, and corresponding sound modes" (v p. 291).
z4 These modes add new channels to 5.1-channel surround using Audyssey DSX® processing. (v p. 183)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

148

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

o Views on the display

q

Playback

w
.
A Shows a decoder to be used. 0 In the case of the Dolby Digital Plus decoder, "y" is displayed.
B Shows a decoder that creates sound output. 0 "k" indicates that the Dolby Surround decoder is being used.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

149

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

HDMI control function
A recent addition to the HDMI standard is CEC (Consumer Electronics Control), which allows control signals from one device to communicate with another device via the HDMI cable connection.
Setting procedure

1 Enable the HDMI control function of this unit. Set "HDMI Control" to "On". (v p. 189)
2 Turn the power on for all the devices connected by HDMI cable.
3 Set the HDMI control function for all devices connected by HDMI cable. 0 Please consult the operating instructions for the connected devices to check the settings. 0 Carry out steps 2 and 3 should any of the devices be unplugged.
4 Switch the television input to the HDMI input connected to this unit.

5 Switch the input source of this unit to check that video from the player connected by HDMI is played back correctly.
6 When you turn the TV's power to standby, check that the power of this unit also goes to standby.
NOTE 0 Some functions may not operate depending on the connected TV or player. Check
the owner's manual of each device for details beforehand. 0 The HDMI ZONE2 function is not compatible with the HDMI control function. 0 When the HDMI ZONE2 function is used with "HDMI Control" in the menu set to
"On", the HDMI ZONE2 function may not fully work.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

150

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Smart Menu function
This function can be used to configure the settings of this unit, select an input source and set Tuner and Internet Radio stations using the TV remote control.
1 Enable the HDMI control function of this unit and the TV. (v p. 189)
2 Set "Smart Menu" to "On" on this unit. (v p. 193) 3 Select "AV Receiver" in a TV menu such as "Input"z or
"Operate Connected HDMI Device"z. The Smart Menu of this unit is displayed on the TV. 0 This unit can be operated with the TV remote control while the
Smart Menu is displayed. z The selection method differs depending on your TV.

Smart Menu

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Now Playing
Enjoy content from the input source currently selected on this unit.
o Source
Switch the input of this unit. If you select "Online Music", "iPod/USB" or "Tuner", you can continue to operate this unit using the TV remote control.
o Sound Mode
Change the sound mode of this unit. You can select from the following three sound modes.

Surround:
Stereo: Multi Ch Stereo:

Surround sound playback according to the input signal.
Stereo playback.
Multi-channel stereo playback.

Now Playing Blu-ray

Source

Sound Mode SSmetaurpt Menu

Smart Select 1 Smart Select 2 Smart Select 3 Smart Select 4 Help
.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

151

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Setup Menu
Displays a setup menu for configuring the settings of this unit.
o Smart Select
Calls up the SMART SELECT items registered to this unit.

NOTE
0 If the "HDMI Control" or "Smart Menu" settings have been changed, always reset the power to connected devices after the change.
0 The Smart Menu function may not work properly depending on the specifications of your TV. In this case, set "Smart Menu" to "Off". (v p. 193)

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

152

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Sleep timer function

Playback

MAIN ZONE2

ZONE SELECT

POWER

MAIN ZONE 2 SLEEP

CBL /SAT

DVD

GAME

AUX1

TV AUDIO

AUX2

Blu-ray MEDIA PLAYER TUNER

iPod/USB

CD

Bluetooth

ONLINE MUSIC

PHONO ECO

INTERNET RADIO

CH / PAGE

MUTE

VOLUME

INFO

OPTION

SLEEP

ENTER

BACK

SETUP

TUNE -

TUNE +

SMART SELECT
1234

SOUND MODE MOVIE MUSIC GAME

PURE

Settings

Tips

Appendix

You can have the power automatically switched to standby once a set time has elapsed. This is convenient for viewing and listening while going to sleep. The sleep timer function can be set for each zone.

.
Front panel

Display

Rear panel

153

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Using the sleep timer
1 Press MAIN or ZONE2 to select the operating zone with the remote control. The button for the selected zone is lit.
2 Press SLEEP and display the time you want to set. 0 The sleep timer indicator lights up on the display and the sleep timer starts. 0 You can set the sleep timer in the range from 10 to 120 minutes in steps of 10 minutes.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Checking the remaining time
Press SLEEP when the sleep timer is in operation. The remaining time appears on the display.
o To cancel the sleep timer
Press SLEEP to select "Off". The sleep timer indicator on the display turns off.

0 The sleep timer setting is canceled when the unit switches to standby mode.
NOTE 0 The sleep timer function cannot turn off the power of devices connected to this
unit. To turn off the power of those connected devices, set up sleep timers on the connected devices themselves.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

154

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Smart select function

Playback

ZONE SELECT MAIN ZONE 2

POWER SLEEP

CBL /SAT

DVD

Blu-ray

GAME

AUX1

TV AUDIO

AUX2

MEDIA PLAYER TUNER

iPod/USB

CD

Bluetooth

ONLINE MUSIC

PHONO ECO

INTERNET RADIO

CH / PAGE

MUTE

VOLUME

INFO

OPTION

ENTER

BACK

SETUP

TUNE -

TUNE +

SMART SELECT
1234

SOUND MODE MOVIE MUSIC GAME

PURE

SMART SELECT 1 ­ 4

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Settings such as the input source, volume level and sound mode can be registered to the SMART SELECT 1 - 4 buttons.
You can simply press one of the registered SMART SELECT buttons in subsequent playbacks to switch to the group of saved settings in a batch.
By saving frequently used settings at the SMART SELECT 1 ­ 4 buttons, you will always be able to easily call up the same playback environment.
The Smart Select function can be memorized for each zone.

.
Front panel

Display

Rear panel

155

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Calling up the settings

1 Press MAIN or ZONE2 to select the operating zone with the remote control.
The button for the selected zone is lit.
2 Press SMART SELECT. The Smart Select settings registered to the button you pressed are called up.

0 The default settings for the input source and volume are as shown below.
GMAIN ZONEH / GZONE2H

Button SMART SELECT 1 SMART SELECT 2 SMART SELECT 3 SMART SELECT 4

Input source CBL/SAT Blu-ray
Media Player Online Music

Volume 40 40 40 40

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

156

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Changing the settings
1 Set the items below to the settings you want to register. The following settings from A to H can be memorized for MAIN ZONE, and settings A and B can be memorized for ZONE2. A Input source (v p. 81) B Volume (v p. 82) C Sound mode (v p. 137) D Audyssey (Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey Dynamic EQ®, Audyssey Dynamic Volume®, Audyssey LFCTM) (v p. 180) E "M-DAX" (v p. 177) F "Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source (Channel Level Adjust)" (v p. 132) G "Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video Select)" (v p. 134) H "Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment (Picture Mode)" (v p. 135)

2 Press MAIN or ZONE2 to select the operating zone with the remote control. The button for the selected zone is lit.
3 Press and hold the desired SMART SELECT until "Smartz Memory" or "Z2 Smartz Memory" appear on the display. The current settings will be memorized. z is displayed the number for the SMART SELECT button you pressed.
o Changing the Smart Select Name
The MAIN ZONE Smart Select name displayed on the TV screen or display of this unit can be changed to a different name. For the name change method, see "Smart Select Names" (v p. 247).

0 Press and hold SMART SELECT while a radio station is being received or a track is being played back with any of the following sources, the current radio station or track is memorized.
0 Tuner / Internet Radio / Media Server / Pandora / SiriusXM / Favorites / iPod/USB

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

157

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Web control function

You can control this unit from a web control screen on a web browser.

PC

Router

This unit

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Controlling the unit from a web control
1 Switch the "Network Control" setting to "Always On". (v p. 238)
2 Check the IP address of this unit with "Information". (v p. 232)

Tablet
.
0 This unit and the PC or tablet need to be connected correctly to the network in order to use the web control function. ("Connecting to a home network (LAN)" (v p. 75))
0 Depending on the settings of your security-related software, you may not be able to access this unit from your PC. If this is the case, then change the settings of the security-related software.

Network/Information

Friendly Name DHCP Connection IP Address MAC Address

Marantz SR6010 On Wired (Ethernet) 192.168.100.19 zzzzzz-000000

Checking the IP address.

Displays the current network settings of the AVR
.
3 Start up the web browser.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

158

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

4 Enter the IP address of this unit in browser's address box. For example, if the IP address of this unit is "192.168.100.19", enter "http://192.168.100.19".
http://192.168.100.19 File Edit View Favorites Tools Help
.

5 When the top menu is displayed, click on the menu item you want to operate.

Setup Menu Audio Video Inputs Speakers Network General

MAIN ZONE CBL/SAT
ZONE2 CBL/SAT

Save
.

Load

0 You can use the "Save" and "Load" functions to store or recall various function settings using web control from a PC.
0 To memorize settings, click "Save" on the Setup Menu screen.
0 To call up settings, click "Load" on the Setup Menu screen.
0 We recommend using one of the following web browsers. Internet Explorer 10 and above Mozilla Firefox 24 and above Google Chrome 29 and above Safari 5.x and above

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

159

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Panel lock function
To prevent accidental operation of this unit, you can disable operation of the buttons on the front panel.
X M-DAX DIMMER STATUS

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Disabling all key button operations
1 Press X while you press and hold M-DAX and DIMMER with the unit in standby mode.
2 Use TUNER PRESET CH + or TUNER PRESET CH - to select "P/V LOCK On".
3 Press STATUS to enter the setting. All button operations except X are disabled.

TUNER PRESET CH ­
.

TUNER PRESET CH +

Disabling all button operations except VOLUME
1 Press X while you press and hold M-DAX and DIMMER with the unit in standby mode.
2 Use TUNER PRESET CH + or TUNER PRESET CH - to select "FP LOCK On".
3 Press STATUS to enter the setting. All button operations except X and VOLUME are disabled.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

160

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Canceling the Panel lock function
1 Press X while you press and hold M-DAX and DIMMER with the unit in standby mode.
2 Press TUNER PRESET CH + or TUNER PRESET CH - to select "FP LOCK zOff". (z The currently set mode.)
3 Press STATUS to enter the setting. The Panel lock function is canceled.

0 Even when the Panel lock function is set, you can operate the unit using the remote control unit.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

161

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Remote lock function
When connecting an IR receiver, enable the Remote lock function. When the function is enabled, you can not perform operations with the remote control unit. By default, this function is disabled.
X M-DAX DIMMER STATUS

TUNER PRESET CH ­
.

TUNER PRESET CH +

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Disabling the sensor function of the remote control unit
1 Press X while you press and hold M-DAX and DIMMER with the unit in standby mode.
2 Use TUNER PRESET CH + or TUNER PRESET CH - to select "RC LOCK On".
3 Press STATUS to enter the setting. The infrared light receiving function is disabled.
Enabling the remote sensor function
1 Press X while you press and hold M-DAX and DIMMER with the unit in standby mode.
2 Press TUNER PRESET CH + or TUNER PRESET CH - to select "RC LOCK zOff". (z The currently set mode.)
3 Press STATUS to enter the setting. Infrared light receiving function on the main unit is enabled.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

162

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Playback in ZONE2 (Separate room)
You can operate this unit to enjoy video and audio in a room (ZONE2) that is different from the room where this unit is placed (MAIN ZONE). You can simultaneously play back the same source in both the MAIN ZONE and ZONE2. You can also play back separate sources in the MAIN ZONE and ZONE2.

Connecting ZONE2
You can use the following three methods to play back video and audio in ZONE2. 0 "Connection through the HDMI ZONE2 connector" (v p. 163) 0 "Connection through the speaker output terminals" (v p. 164) 0 "Connecting using an external amplifier" (v p. 164)

o Connection 1 : Connection through the HDMI ZONE2 connector

When a TV is connected to the HDMI ZONE2 OUT connector, you can play back a video or audio from the device connected to the HDMI 1 ­ 7 IN connector in ZONE2 (HDMI ZONE2 function).

MAIN ZONE

ZONE2

HDMI ZONE2

HDMI

.
When a TV is connected to the HDMI ZONE2 OUT connector, and the MAIN ZONE and ZONE2 are set to the same input source, the MAIN ZONE audio may be mixed down to 2-channel audio.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

163

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Connection 2: Connection through the speaker output terminals
When "Assign Mode" is set to "ZONE2" in the menu, ZONE2 audio is output from the SURROUND BACK speaker terminal. (v p. 216)
MAIN ZONE

This unit

SURROUND BACK SURROUND BACK

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Connection 3 : Connection using an external amplifier

The audio signals of this unit's ZONE2 audio output connectors are output to the ZONE2 amplifiers and played on these amplifiers.

MAIN ZONE

ZONE2

This unit
.

Power amplifier
L R
AUX IN

(R)

(L)

ZONE2

.

0 The analog audio signal and the 2-channel PCM signal input from HDMI connector or digital connectors (OPTICAL/COAXIAL) can be played back in ZONE2.
0 If you want to play back HDMI signals other than 2-channel PCM in ZONE 2, set "HDMI Audio" to "PCM". (v p. 245) The output from a device connected to the input source selected for ZONE2 can be automatically converted to 2-channel PCM. In this case, the MAIN ZONE audio will also be converted to 2-channel PCM if the MAIN ZONE and ZONE2 are set to the same input source. However, depending on the playback device, the playback signal may not be converted to PCM even if this setting is configured.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

164

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback in ZONE2

ZONE2
Input source select buttons
MUTE :

ZONE SELECT MAIN ZONE 2

POWER SLEEP

CBL /SAT

DVD

GAME

AUX1

TV AUDIO

AUX2

Blu-ray MEDIA PLAYER TUNER

iPod/USB

CD

Bluetooth

ONLINE MUSIC

PHONO ECO

INTERNET RADIO

CH / PAGE

MUTE

VOLUME

INFO

OPTION

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

POWER X VOLUME df

1 Press ZONE2 to set the operating zone to ZONE2 with the remote control. The ZONE2 button lights.
2 Press POWER X to turn on the ZONE2 power. The ZONE2 power indicator on the display lights. 0 Power in ZONE2 can be turned on or off by pressing ZONE2 ON/OFF on the main unit.
3 Press the input source select button to select the input source to be played. The audio signal of the selected source is output to ZONE2. 0 To perform an operation with the main unit, press ZONE2 SOURCE. Each time you press ZONE2 SOURCE, the input source changes.

BACK

ENTER

SETUP

TUNE -

TUNE +

SMART SELECT
1234

SOUND MODE MOVIE MUSIC GAME

PURE

.
Front panel

Display

Rear panel

165

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Adjusting the volume (ZONE2)
Use VOLUME df to adjust the volume. 0 At time of purchase, "Volume Limit" is set to "70­10 dB".
(v p. 245)

0 Turn VOLUME after pressing ZONE2 SOURCE on the main unit to adjust the volume.
o Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting) (ZONE2)
Press MUTE :. The sound is reduced to the level set at "Mute Level" in the menu. (v p. 246) 0 To cancel mute, either adjust the sound volume or press MUTE :
again.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

166

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Menu map

When using menu operations, connect this unit to a TV and operate this unit while viewing the TV. The recommended settings are configured for this unit by default. You can customize this unit based on your existing system and your preferences.

Setting items

Detailed items

Description

Page

Dialog Level Adjust

This setting adjusts the output level to clarify the dialogue output from the center

173

channel.

Subwoofer Level Adjust This setting adjusts the volume level for the subwoofer.

173

.
Audio

Surround Parameter M-DAX

Adjusts surround sound parameters.

174

Expands the low and high frequency components of compressed audio content such as

177

MP3 files to enable richer audio playback.

Audio Delay

Compensates for incorrect timing between video and audio.

178

Volume

Sets the MAIN ZONE (room where the unit is located) volume setting.

178

Audyssey

Makes Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey Dynamic EQ®, Audyssey Dynamic

180

Volume®, Audyssey LFCTM and Audyssey DSX® settings.

Graphic EQ

Uses the graphic equalizer to adjust the tone of each speaker.

184

Picture Adjust

Adjusts picture quality.

186

HDMI Setup

Makes settings for HDMI video/audio output.

188

Output Settings

Makes settings for video output.

194

.

On Screen Display

Configures the on-screen display settings.

198

Video

TV Format

Sets the video signal format to be output for the TV you are using.

199

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

167

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Setting items
.
Inputs

Detailed items Input Assign Source Rename Hide Sources Source Level Input Select Audyssey® Setup

. Speakers
. Network

Manual Setup
Information Connection Settings Network Control Friendly Name

Diagnostics Maintenance Mode

Description Changes input connector assignment. Changes the display name for input source. Removes from the display input sources that are not used. Adjusts the playback level of the audio input. Sets the audio input mode and decode mode. The acoustic characteristics of the connected speakers and listening room are measured and the optimum settings are made automatically. Sets up the speakers manually or changes the Audyssey® Setup settings.

Page 200 202 203 203 204 205
216

Displays network information.

232

Selects whether to connect the home network to a wireless LAN or a wired LAN.

232

Used for manually setting the IP address or when using a proxy server.

236

Enables network communication in standby power mode.

238

The "Friendly Name" is the name of this unit displayed on the network. You can change

238

the Friendly Name according to your preferences.

Used to check the network connection.

239

Used when receiving maintenance from a Marantz service engineer or custom installer.

240

This mode is not designed for use by the end user, and should only be used by a trained

service technician or custom installation professional.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

168

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Setting items
.
General

Detailed items Language ECO ZONE2 Setup Zone Rename Smart Select Names Trigger Out Front Display Firmware

Information Usage Data Setup Lock Begin Setup...

Language Select

.

Speaker Setup

Setup Assistant Speaker Calibration

Network Setup

TV Audio Connection

Input Setup

Description Changes the language of the display on the TV screen. Configures the ECO Mode and Auto Standby energy-saving functions. Makes settings for audio playback with ZONE2. Changes the display title of each zone to one you prefer. Changes the Smart Select Name display title to one you prefer. Select the conditions for activating trigger out function. Makes settings related to the display on this unit. Checks for the latest firmware information about updates and upgrades, updates the firmware, and sets up the notification message display. Shows information about this unit settings, input signals, etc. Selects whether or not to send anonymous usage data to Marantz. Protects settings from inadvertent changes. Performs basic installation/connections/settings from the beginning according to the guidance indicated on the TV screen. Sets individual setting items according to the guidance displayed on the TV screen.

Page 241 241 244 246 247 247 248 249
251 252 253 Page 9 of the separate manual "Quick Start Guide"

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

169

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

MAIN
uio p ENTER
BACK

ZONE SELECT

POWER

MAIN ZONE 2 SLEEP

CBL /SAT

DVD

GAME

AUX1

TV AUDIO

AUX2

Blu-ray MEDIA PLAYER TUNER

iPod/USB

CD

Bluetooth

ONLINE MUSIC

PHONO ECO

INTERNET RADIO

CH / PAGE

MUTE

VOLUME

INFO

OPTION

ENTER

BACK

SETUP

TUNE -

TUNE +

SMART SELECT
1234

SOUND MODE MOVIE MUSIC GAME

PURE

SETUP

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Menu operations
1 Press MAIN on the remote control unit to set the operating zone to the MAIN ZONE. The MAIN button lights.
2 Press SETUP. The menu is displayed on the TV screen.
3 Use ui p to select the menu to be set or operated, then press ENTER.
4 Use o p to change to desired setting. 5 Press ENTER to enter the setting.
0 To return to the previous item, press BACK. 0 Exiting the menu, press SETUP while the menu is displayed. The
menu display disappears.

.
Front panel

Display

Rear panel

170

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Inputting characters
On this unit, you can change the name displayed on the following screens to the names that you prefer. 0 Preset Name (v p. 101) 0 Text Search (v p. 129) 0 Source Rename (v p. 202) 0 Friendly Name (v p. 238) 0 Zone Rename (v p. 246) 0 Smart Select Names (v p. 247) 0 Character input for the network functions

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

171

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Using the keyboard screen

1 Display the screen for inputting characters. GExampleH "Source Rename" screen

Inputs/Source Rename

CBL/SAT

CBL/SAT

Clear

Insert

Delete

ABCDE FGH I

J K LM

NOPQR S TUVWX Y Z

0123456789 ! " #

$ % & ` ( ) * + , ; <=>

a / A

Space

Cancel

O K

Changes the display name for this source

.
2 Use uio p to select , or ..

Settings

Tips

Appendix

3 Press ENTER to move the cursor to the character that you wish to change. 0 Each time ENTER is pressed, the cursor moves by one character.
4 Select a character to be input with uio p then press ENTER.
5 Repeat steps 2 - 4 to change the name. 6 Use uio p to select "OK", then press ENTER.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

172

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Audio
Make audio-related settings.

Dialog Level Adjust

This setting adjusts the output level to clarify the dialogue output from the center channel.

o Dialog Level Adjust

Set whether to adjust the dialog level or not.

On:
Off (Default):

Enables the adjustment of the dialog level.
Disables the adjustment of the dialog level.

o Level
Adjusts the volume output from the center channel. ­12.0 dB ­ +12.0 dB (Default : 0.0 dB)

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Subwoofer Level Adjust

This setting adjusts the volume level for the subwoofer.

o Subwoofer Level Adjust

Set whether to adjust the subwoofer level.

On:
Off (Default):

Enables the adjustment of the subwoofer level.
Disables the adjustment of the subwoofer level.

o Subwoofer 1 Level /Subwoofer 2 Level
Adjusts the volume level for the Subwoofer 1 and Subwoofer 2. ­12.0 dB ­ +12.0 dB (Default : 0.0 dB)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

173

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Surround Parameter
You can adjust the surround audio sound field effects to match your preferences. The items (parameters) that can be adjusted depend on the signal being input and the currently set sound mode. For details on the adjustable parameters, see "Sound modes and surround parameters" (v p. 288).

0 Some setting items cannot be set while playback is stopped. Make the settings during playback.
0 "Surround Parameter" settings are stored for each sound mode.

o Cinema EQ

Gently softens the upper treble range of movie soundtracks to reduce possible harshness and improve clarity.

On:
Off (Default):

"Cinema EQ" is used. "Cinema EQ" is not used.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Loudness Management

This sets whether to output as specified in "Dynamic Compression" or output directly without compressing the dynamic range of audio recorded in the disc.

On (Default):
Off:

Outputs are given based on enabling the settings made in "Dynamic Compression" and Dialog normalization function.
"Dynamic Compression" settings and Dialogue Normalization are disabled, and the signals on the disc are output as is.

0 "Loudness Management" can be set when Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD and Dolby Atmos signal is input.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

174

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Dynamic Compression

Compress dynamic range (difference between loud and soft sounds).

Auto: Low / Medium / High: Off:

Automatic dynamic range compression on/off control according to source.
These set the compression level.
Dynamic range compression is always off.

0 "Dynamic Compression" can be set when Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Atmos signal is input.
0 The default setting is "Off". When the input signal is the Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Atmos source, the default setting is "Auto".
o Dialog Control
Adjust the volume of dialog in movies, vocals in music, etc. so these can be heard more easily.
0 ­ 6 (Default : 0)

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Low Frequency Effects
Adjust the low frequency effects level (LFE).
n When "Input Mode" is set other than to "7.1CH IN"
-10 dB ­ 0 dB (Default : 0 dB)
n When "Input Mode" is set to "7.1CH IN"
0 dB / +5 dB / +10 dB / +15 dB (Default: +10 dB)

0 For proper playback of the different sources, we recommend setting to the values below.
0 Dolby Digital sources : 0 dB 0 DTS movie sources : 0 dB 0 DTS music sources: -10 dB

0 This can be set when a DTS:X signal that is compatible with the Dialog Control function is input.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

175

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Center Spread

Center spread expands the center channel signal to left and right front speakers to create a wider frontal audio image for the listener. It is optimized and designed primary for playback of stereo music content.

On:
Off (Default):

Use "Center Spread". Do not use "Center Spread".

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Speaker Select
Makes settings for the speakers outputting sound.

Floor (Default): Floor & Height:
Front:

Plays back without height speakers.
Plays back with height speakers. Plays back only with speakers in front of the surround speaker.

0 You can set this when sound mode is "Dolby Surround".

o DTS Neural:X

DTS Neural:X Expands the non-object based audio signals and optimizes them for your speaker configuration.

On (Default):
Off:

Use "DTS Neural:X". Do not use "DTS Neural:X".

0 This can be set when the sound mode is the original sound mode.

0 You can set this when sound mode is "DTS:X" or "DTS:X MSTR".

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

176

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Subwoofer

Turn subwoofer output on and off.

On (Default):
Off:

The subwoofer is used. The subwoofer is not used.

0 You can set this when the sound mode is "Direct" or "Stereo" and in the menu "Subwoofer Mode" is set to "LFE+Main". (v p. 230)
o Set Defaults
The "Surround Parameter" settings are returned to the default settings.

M-DAX

Compressed audio formats such as MP3, WMA (Windows Media Audio) and MPEG-4 AAC reduce the amount of data by eliminating signal components that are hard for the human ear to hear. The "M-DAX" function generates the signals eliminated upon compression, restoring the sound to conditions near those of the original sound before compression. It also restores the original bass characteristics for a rich and expanded tonal range.
o Mode

High:
Medium: Low: Off:

Optimized mode for compressed sources with very weak highs (64 kbps and under).
Apply suitable bass and treble boost for all compressed sources (96 kbps and under).
Optimized mode for compressed sources with normal highs (96 kbps and over).
Do not use "M-DAX".

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

177

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

0 The M-DAX indicator lights. 0 This item can be set with analog signals or PCM signal (Sample Rate =
44.1/48 kHz) is input. 0 This item default setting for "Online Music", "iPod/USB" and "Bluetooth" is
"Low". All others are set to "Off". 0 This cannot be set when the sound mode is set to "Direct" or "Pure Direct". 0 This cannot be set when the input mode is set to "7.1CH IN". 0 "M-DAX" settings are stored for each input source. 0 This can also be set by pressing M-DAX on the main unit.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Audio Delay
Compensates for incorrect timing between video and audio. 0 ms ­ 200 ms (Default : 0 ms)

0 Audio Delay for game mode can be set when "Video Mode" is set to "Auto" or "Game". (v p. 194)
0 This cannot be set when the input mode is set to "7.1CH IN". 0 "Audio Delay" settings are stored for each input source.

Volume

Set the MAIN ZONE (room where the unit is located) volume setting.

o Scale

Set how volume is displayed.

0 - 98 (Default):
­79.5 dB ­ 18.0 dB:

Display in the range 0 (Min) to 98.
Display ---dB (Min), in the range ­79.5 dB to 18.0 dB.

0 "Scale" settings are reflected in all the zones.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

178

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Limit
Make a setting for maximum volume. 60 (­20 dB) / 70 (­10 dB) / 80 (0 dB) Off (Default)

o Power On Level

Define the volume setting that is active when the power is turned on.

Last (Default):
Mute:
1 ­ 98 (­79 dB ­ 18 dB) :

Use the memorized setting from the last session.
Always use the muting on condition when power is turned on.
The volume is adjusted to the set level.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Mute Level

Set the amount of attenuation when muting is on.

Full (Default):
­40 dB :
­20 dB :

The sound is muted entirely.
The sound is attenuated by 40 dB down. The sound is attenuated by 20 dB down.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

179

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Audyssey®
Set Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey Dynamic EQ®, Audyssey Dynamic Volume® and Audyssey LFCTM. These can be selected after Audyssey® Setup has been performed. For additional information on Audyssey technology, please see "Explanation of terms" (v p. 294).

0 "MultEQ® XT32", "Dynamic EQ", "Reference Level Offset", "Dynamic Volume", "Audyssey LFCTM", "Containment Amount" and "Audyssey DSX®" settings are stored for each input source.
0 When the sound mode is in the "Direct" or "Pure Direct" mode, "MultEQ® XT32", "Dynamic EQ" and "Dynamic Volume" settings cannot be configured.
0 This cannot be set when the input mode is set to "7.1CH IN".

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o MultEQ® XT32

MultEQ® XT32 compensates for both time and frequency characteristics of the listening area based on Audyssey® Setup measurement results. Selection is done from three types of compensation curves. We recommend the "Reference" setting.

Reference (Default): L/R Bypass:
Flat: Off :

Selects the default calibrated setting with a slight roll off at high frequencies, which is optimized for movies.
Selects the reference setting, but bypasses MultEQ® XT32 on the front left and right speakers.
Selects the calibrated setting which is optimized for small rooms where your listening position is closer to the speakers.
Do not use "MultEQ® XT32".

0 When using headphones, "MultEQ® XT32" is automatically set to "Off".

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

180

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Dynamic EQ

Solves the problem of deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased by taking into account human perception and room acoustics.
Works with MultEQ® XT32.

On (Default):
Off:

Use Dynamic EQ. Do not use Dynamic EQ.

0 When the menu "Dynamic EQ" setting is "On", it is not possible to do "Tone" adjustment. (v p. 133)

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Reference Level Offset

Audyssey Dynamic EQ® is referenced to the standard film mix level. It makes adjustments to maintain the reference response and surround envelopment when the volume is turned down from 0 dB. However, film reference level is not always used in music or other non-film content. Dynamic EQ Reference Level Offset provides three offsets from the film level reference (5 dB, 10 dB, and 15 dB) that can be selected when the mix level of the content is not within the standard. Recommended setting levels for content are shown below.

0 dB (Film Reference) (Default): 5 dB : 10 dB :
15 dB :

Optimized for content such as movies.
Select this setting for content that has a very wide dynamic range, such as classical music. Select this setting for jazz or other music that has a wider dynamic range. This setting should also be selected for TV content as that is usually mixed at 10 dB below film reference. Select this setting for pop/rock music or other program material that is mixed at very high listening levels and has a compressed dynamic range.

0 Setting is enabled when "Dynamic EQ" is "On". (v p. 181)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

181

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Dynamic Volume

Solves the problem of large variations in volume level between TV, movies and other content (between quiet passages and loud passages, etc.) by automatically adjusting to the user's preferred volume setting.

Heavy:
Medium:
Light: Off (Default):

Most adjustment to softest and loudest sounds. Medium adjustment to loudest and softest sound. Least adjustment to loudest and softest sounds.
Do not use Dynamic Volume.

0 If "Dynamic Volume" is set to "Yes" in "Audyssey® Setup", the setting is automatically changed to "Medium". (v p. 205)

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Audyssey LFCTM

Adjusts the low frequency band to prevent bass and vibration from being conveyed to neighboring rooms.

On:
Off (Default):

Use "Audyssey LFCTM". Do not use "Audyssey LFCTM".

o Containment Amount
Adjusts the amount of low frequency containment. Use higher settings if you have close neighbors.
1 ­ 7 (Default : 4)

0 This can be set when "Audyssey LFCTM" in the menu is set to "On".

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

182

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Audyssey DSX®

Provides more immersive surround sound by adding the new channels.

Wide: Height:
Wides/Heights: Off (Default):

Turn on Audyssey DSX® processing for front wide channel expansion.
Turn on Audyssey DSX® processing for front height channel expansion.
Turns on Audyssey DSX® processing for front wide and front height channel expansion.
Do not set "Audyssey DSX®".

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Stage Width
Adjust sound stage width when using front wide speakers. ­10 ­ +10 (Default : 0)
o Stage Height
Adjust sound stage height when using front height speakers. ­10 ­ +10 (Default : 0)

0 "Audyssey DSX®" can be set when you are using front height speakers or front wide speakers.
0 "Audyssey DSX®" is only valid when using a center speaker.
0 When 2-channel signals are being played back, "Audyssey DSX®" cannot be used.
0 "Audyssey DSX®" cannot be configured if the HD Audio source being played includes Front height and Front wide channels. In this case, the respective channels are played back using the input signals.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

183

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Graphic EQ
Uses the graphic equalizer to adjust the tone of each speaker.

0 Speakers for which "Graphic EQ" can be set differ according to the sound mode. 0 This can be set when the "MultEQ® XT32" setting is "Off". (v p. 180) 0 This cannot be set when the sound mode is set to "Direct" or "Pure Direct". 0 If you are using headphones, you can set the equalizer for headphones.
(v p. 184) 0 This cannot be set when the input mode is set to "7.1CH IN".

o Graphic EQ

Set whether to use the graphic equalizer or not.

On:
Off (Default):

Use the graphic equalizer. Do not use the graphic equalizer.

o When using headphones n Headphone EQ

Set whether to use the graphic equalizer for headphones or not.

On:
Off (Default):

Use the graphic equalizer for headphones.
Do not use the graphic equalizer for headphones.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Speaker Selection

Select whether to adjust tones for individual speakers or for all speakers.

All:
Left/Right (Default):
Each:

Adjust all speaker tones together.
Adjust the left and right speaker tones together.
Adjust the tone for each speaker.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

184

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Adjust EQ
Adjust tonal balance for each frequency band.
1. Select the speaker. 2. Select the adjustment frequency band.
63 Hz / 125 Hz / 250 Hz / 500 Hz / 1 kHz / 2 kHz / 4 kHz / 8 kHz / 16 kHz 3. Adjust the level. ­20.0 dB ­ +6.0 dB (Default : 0.0 dB)

0 Front Dolby, Surround Dolby and Back Dolby speakers can only be set when 63 Hz/125 Hz/250 Hz/500 Hz/1 kHz.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Curve Copy
Copy the Flat correction curve created in the Audyssey® Setup.

0 "Curve Copy" is displayed after Audyssey® Setup has been performed. 0 "Curve Copy" cannot be used when using headphones.
o Set Defaults
The "Graphic EQ" settings are returned to the default settings.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

185

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Video
Make video-related settings.

Picture Adjust
Picture quality can be adjusted.

Playback

0 Can be set when the "Video Conversion" setting is "On". (v p. 195) 0 Can be set when "HDMI", "COMP" or "VIDEO" is assigned for each input source.
(v p. 201) 0 "Contrast", "Brightness", "Saturation", "Noise Reduction" and "Enhancer" can be
set when "Picture Mode" is set to "Custom". (v p. 135) 0 "Picture Adjust" settings are stored for each input source. 0 "Picture Adjust" cannot be set when 4K signals are input.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Picture Mode

Select the desired picture mode according to the video content and your viewing environment.

Standard: Movie: Vivid: Streaming: ISF Day: ISF Night: Custom: Off:

The standard mode suited for most living room viewing environments.
A mode suited for watching movies in a dark room such as a theater room.
A mode that makes graphic images for games, etc. brighter and more vivid.
A mode suited for low bit rate video sources.
A mode suited for watching movies in a bright room during the day.
A mode suited for watching movies in a dark room at night.
Adjusts the picture quality manually.
No picture quality adjustment is done with this unit.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

186

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

0 The two special adjustment modes, ISF Day and ISF Night, should be used by a certified technician to adjust the color calibration to match the installation conditions. We recommend that the settings and adjustments be carried out by an ISFcertified technician.
0 These settings can also be configured using "Picture Mode" in the option menu. (v p. 135)
0 The default settings are as follows.
0 For "Online Music" and "iPod/USB" input sources: Streaming
0 For input sources other than "Online Music" and "iPod/USB": Off

Settings

Tips

o Contrast
Adjust picture contrast. -50 ­ +50 (Default : 0)

o Brightness
Adjust picture brightness. -50 ­ +50 (Default : 0)

o Saturation
Adjust picture chroma level (color saturation). -50 ­ +50 (Default : 0)

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

187

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

o Noise Reduction
Reduce overall video noise. Low / Medium / High / Off (Default : Off)

o Enhancer
Emphasize picture sharpness. 0 ­ +12 (Default : 0)

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

HDMI Setup
Make settings for HDMI video/audio output.
NOTE 0 When "HDMI Control" and "HDMI Pass Through" is set to "On", it consumes more
standby power. ("HDMI Control" (v p. 189), "HDMI Pass Through" (v p. 190)) If you are not using this unit for an extended period, it is recommended that you unplug the power cord from the power outlet.

o Auto Lip Sync

Make automatic compensation for timing shift in audio and video output.

On (Default):
Off:

Correct automatically. Do not correct automatically.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

188

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o HDMI Audio Out

Select HDMI audio output device.

AVR (Default):
TV:

Play back through speakers connected to the unit.
Play back through TV connected to the unit.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o HDMI Control

You can link operations with devices connected to HDMI and compatible with HDMI Control.

On:
Off (Default):

Use HDMI control function. Do not use HDMI control function.

0 When the HDMI control function is activated, priority is given to the TV audio setting. (v p. 150)
0 When the power of this unit is on and "HDMI Audio Out" is set to "TV", audio is output as 2-channel from the HDMI OUT connector.

0 If using the HDMI control function, connect a TV compatible with HDMI control to the HDMI MONITOR connector.
0 Please consult the operating instructions for each connected device to check the settings.
0 Refer to "HDMI control function" for more information about the HDMI control function. (v p. 150)
NOTE 0 If the "HDMI Control" settings have been changed, always reset the power to
connected devices after the change.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

189

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o ARC

On the TV connected to the HDMI MONITOR connector, set whether to receive sound from the TV via HDMI.

On:
Off (Default):

Use ARC function. Do not use ARC function.

0 You can adjust the volume of this unit using the TV remote control. 0 If using this function, use a TV compatible with ARC (Audio Return Channel)
and enable the HDMI control function of the TV. 0 When "HDMI Control" is set to "On", the "ARC" settings automatically switch
"On". (v p. 189)
NOTE 0 If the "ARC" settings have been changed, always reset the power to
connected devices after the change.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o HDMI Pass Through

Selects how this unit will transmit HDMI signals to the HDMI output in standby power mode.

On (Default):
Off:

Transmits the selected HDMI input through the AV receiver's HDMI output when this unit is in standby power mode.
No HDMI signals are transmitted through this unit's HDMI output in standby power mode.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

190

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Pass Through Source

Sets the HDMI connector that inputs HDMI signals when in standby.

Last:

The most recently used input source will go into standby mode.

CBL/SAT / DVD / Blu-ray / Game / AUX1 / AUX2 / Media Player / CDz (Default : CBL/SAT):

Pass through the selected input source.

z"Pass Through Source" can be set when any of the HDMI connectors is assigned to "CD" for the input source in the "Input Assign" setting. (v p. 200)

0 "Pass Through Source" can be set when "HDMI Control" is set to "On" or "HDMI Pass Through" is set to "On". ("HDMI Control" (v p. 189), "HDMI Pass Through" (v p. 190))

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o TV Audio Switching

Sets automatic switching to the "TV Audio" input when a TV connected via HDMI sends an appropriate CEC control command to the AVR.

On (Default):
Off:

Select the "TV Audio" input automatically when receiving a command from the TV.
Do not select the "TV Audio" input automatically when receiving a command from the TV.

0 "TV Audio Switching" can be set when "HDMI Control" is set to "On". (v p. 189)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

191

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Power Off Control

Links the power standby of this unit to external devices.

All (Default):
Video:
Off:

If power to a connected TV is turned off independently of the input source, power to this unit is automatically set to standby.
With an input source being selected that is assigned either "HDMI", "COMP" or "VIDEO", when you turn the power of the TV off, power to this unit is automatically set to standby. (v p. 201)
This unit does not link with power to a TV.

0 "Power Off Control" can be set when "HDMI Control" is set to "On". (v p. 189)

o Power Saving

If "TV Speaker" is set as the audio output setting of your TV, this unit is automatically set to standby mode to reduce power consumption. This function is activated in the following cases. 0 When "TV Audio" is selected as the input source of this unit 0 When playing content from a device connected by HDMI

On:
Off (Default):

Use Power Saving function. Do not use Power Saving function.

0 "Power Saving" can be set when "HDMI Control" is set to "On". (v p. 189)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

192

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Smart Menu

This function can be used to configure the settings of this unit, select an input source and set Tuner and Internet Radio stations using the TV remote control.

On:

Use Smart Menu function.

Off:

Do not use Smart Menu function.

0 "Smart Menu" can be set when "HDMI Control" is set to "On". (v p. 189)
NOTE 0 If the "Smart Menu" settings have been changed, always reset the power to
connected devices after the change. 0 The Smart Menu function may not work properly depending on the
specifications of your TV. In this case, set "Smart Menu" to "Off".

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

193

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Output Settings
Makes settings for video output.

Playback

0 Can be set when "HDMI", "COMP" or "VIDEO" is assigned for each input source. (v p. 201)
0 "Resolution", "Progressive Mode" and "Aspect Ratio" can be set when "i/p Scaler" is set to anything other than "Off". ("Resolution" (v p. 196), "Progressive Mode" (v p. 197), "Aspect Ratio" (v p. 197))
0 "Output Settings" cannot be set when 4K signals are input. 0 "Video Conversion", "i/p Scaler", "Resolution", "Progressive Mode" and "Aspect
Ratio" settings are stored for each input source. ("Video Conversion" (v p. 195), "i/p Scaler" (v p. 195), "Resolution" (v p. 196), "Progressive Mode" (v p. 197), "Aspect Ratio" (v p. 197))

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Video Mode

Configure the video processing method to match the type of video content.

Auto (Default):
Game:
Movie:

Process video automatically based on the HDMI content information.
Always process video for game content. Minimize the video delay when the video is delayed compared to the button operations on the controller of the game console.
Perform image processing that is suitable for contents other than games.

0 If "Video Mode" is set to "Auto", the mode is switched according to the input contents.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

194

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Video Conversion

The input video signal is converted automatically in conjunction with the connected TV. (v p. 280)

On (Default):
Off:

The input video signal is converted. The input video signal is not converted.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o i/p Scaler
Set the video input signal to be subjected to i/p scaler processing. i/p Scaler will convert the resolution of the input video signal to the value set in "Resolution". (v p. 196)
n When the input source is set other than to "iPod/ USB" and "Online Music"

Analog (Default): Analog & HDMI:
HDMI: Off:

Use i/p (interlace-to-progressive) scaler function for analog video signals.
Use i/p scaler function for analog and HDMI video signal.
Use i/p scaler function for HDMI video signals.
Do not use i/p scaler function.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

195

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

n When the input source is set to "iPod/USB" and "Online Music"

On (Default):
Off:

Use i/p scaler function. Do not use i/p scaler function.

0 "Analog & HDMI" can be set for input sources for which an HDMI input connector is assigned.
0 Which items can be set depend on the input source assigned to each input connector.
0 This function is not effective when the input signal is "x.v.Color", 3D, sYCC601 color, Adobe RGB color, Adobe YCC601 color or computer resolutions.

o Resolution

Set the output resolution. You can set "Resolution" separately for HDMI output of the analog video input and HDMI input.

Auto (Default):
480p/576p / 1080i / 720p / 1080p / 1080p:24Hz / 4K / 4K(60/50) :

The resolution supported by the TV connected to the HDMI MONITOR OUT connector is detected automatically and the appropriate output resolution is set.
Set the output resolution.

0 When "i/p Scaler" is set to "Analog & HDMI", the resolution of both the analog video input signal and HDMI input signal can be set. (v p. 195)
0 When set to "1080p:24Hz", you can enjoy film-like pictures for film sources (in 24 Hz). For video sources and mixed sources, we recommend setting the resolution to "1080p".
0 It is not possible to convert a 50 Hz signal into 1080p/24Hz. It is output at a resolution of 1080p/50Hz.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

196

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Progressive Mode

Set an appropriate progressive conversion mode for the source video signal.

Auto (Default):
Video:
Video and Film:

The video signal is automatically detected and the appropriate mode is set.
Select mode suitable for video playback.
Select mode suitable for video and 30frame film material playback.

0 This item can be set when "i/p Scaler" is set to anything other than "Off". (v p. 195)

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Aspect Ratio

Set the aspect ratio for the video signals output to the HDMI.

16:9 (Default):
4:3 :

Output at 16:9 aspect ratio.
Output at 4:3 aspect ratio with black bars on the sides of a 16:9 TV screen. (except for 480p/576p output)

0 This item can be set when "i/p Scaler" is set to anything other than "Off". (v p. 195)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

197

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

On Screen Display

Select the on-screen display user interface preferences.

o Volume

Sets where to display the volume level.

Bottom (Default):
Top:
Off:

Display at the bottom.
Display at the top. Turn display off.

0 When the master volume display is hard to see when superimposed text (closed captioning) or movie subtitles are present, set to "Top".

o Info

Displays status of operation temporarily when the input source is switched.

On (Default):
Off:

Turn display on. Turn display off.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Now Playing

Sets the display time for the playback display when the input source is "Online Music", "iPod/USB", "Bluetooth" or "Tuner".

Always On (Default):

Show display continuously.

Auto Off:

Show display for 30 seconds after operation.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

198

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

TV Format

Set the video signal format to be output for the TV you are using.
o Format

NTSC (Default):
PAL:

Select NTSC output. Select PAL output.

0 "Format" can also be set by the following procedure. However, the menu screen is not displayed. Following the display content to make the setting. 1. Press and hold the main unit's ZONE2 SOURCE and STATUS at the same time for at least 3 seconds. "Video Format <NTSC>" appears on the display. 2. Use the main unit's TUNER PRESET CH + or TUNER PRESET CH - and set the video signal format. 3. Press the main unit's STATUS to complete the setting.
NOTE 0 When a format other than the video format of the connected TV is set, the
picture will not be displayed properly.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

199

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Inputs
Perform settings related to input source playback. You do not have to change the settings to use the unit. Make settings when needed.

Input Assign
By making connections as indicated by the input sources printed on the audio/video input connectors of this unit, you can just press one of the input source select buttons to easily play back audio or video from a connected device. Please change the assignment of the HDMI input connector, digital audio input connector, analog audio input connector, component video input connector and video input connector when connecting an input source that differs from that printed to the audio/video input connectors of this unit.

Inputs/Input Assign

Set Defaults CBL/SAT DVD Blu-ray Game Media Player TV Audio AUX1 AUX2 CD

HDMI DIGITAL ANALOG COMP

1 COAX1 1

1

2 COAX2 2

2

3

-

3

-

4

-

4

-

5

-

-

-

- OPT1 -

-

Front - Front -

6

-

-

-

- OPT2 5

-

VIDEO
1 2 3 Front -

Changes HDMI input assignments

.

0 By default, each item is set as follows.

Input source

Input connector HDMI DIGITAL ANALOG COMP

CBL/SAT

1

COAX1

1

1

DVD

2

COAX2

2

2

Blu-ray

3

­

3

­

Game

4

­

4

­

Media Player

5

­

­

­

TV Audio

­

OPT1

­

­

AUX1

Front

­

Front

­

AUX2

6

­

­

­

CD

­

OPT2

5

­

VIDEO 1 2 3 ­ ­ ­
Front ­ ­

n TV set top box/satellite users please note
When using the digital audio output on a TV/satellite box: To play the video signal assigned to "HDMI" combined with the audio signal assigned at "Input Assign" - "DIGITAL", you will also need to select "Digital" in the "Input Mode". (v p. 204)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

200

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o HDMI

Set this to change the HDMI input connectors assigned to the input sources.

1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7 / Front:
­ :

Assign an HDMI input connector to the selected input source.
Do not assign an HDMI input connector to the selected input source.

0 When "HDMI Control" or "ARC" is set to "On" in the menu, "HDMI" cannot be assigned to "TV Audio". (v p. 189)

o DIGITAL

Set this to change the digital audio input connectors assigned to the input sources.

COAX1 (Coaxial) / COAX2 / OPT1 (Optical) / OPT2:
­ :

Assign a digital audio input connector to the selected input source.
Do not assign a digital audio input connector to the selected input source.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o ANALOG

Set this to change the analog audio input connectors assigned to the input sources.

1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / Front:

Assign a analog audio input connector to the selected input source.

­ :

Do not assign a analog audio input connector to the selected input source.

o COMP (Component video)

Set this to change the component video input connectors assigned to the input sources.

1 / 2: ­ :

Assign the component video input connector to the selected input source.
Do not assign a component video input connector to the selected input source.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

201

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o VIDEO

Set this to change the composite video input connectors assigned to the input sources.

1 / 2 / 3 / Front:

Assign the video input connector to the selected input source.

­ :

Do not assign a video input connector to the selected input source.

o Set Defaults
The "Input Assign" settings are returned to the default settings.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Source Rename

Change the display name for input source.
This is convenient when the name of your device and the input source name of this unit are different. You can change the name to suit your needs. When the renaming is completed, the name is displayed on this unit's display and on the menu screen.

CBL/SAT / DVD / Blu-ray / Game / AUX1 / AUX2 / Media Player / CD / TV Audio / Phono:
Set Defaults:

Change the display name for input source.
The Source Rename settings are returned to the default settings.

0 Up to 12 characters can be input. For character input, see "Using the keyboard screen" (v p. 172).

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

202

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Hide Sources

Remove from the display input sources that are not used.

Show (Default):

Use this source.

Hide:

Do not use this source.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Source Level
This function corrects the playback level of the selected input source's audio input. Make this setting if there are differences in the input volume levels between the different sources.
-12 dB ­ +12 dB (Default : 0 dB)

0 "Source Level" settings are stored for each input source.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

203

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Input Select
Set the audio input mode and decode mode of each input source. The input modes available for selection may vary depending on the input source.

0 "Input Select" settings are stored for each input source.

o Input Mode

Set the audio input modes for the different input sources. It is normally recommended to set the audio input mode to "Auto".

Auto (Default): HDMI: Digital: Analog:
7.1CH IN:

Automatically detect input signal and perform playback.
Play only signals from HDMI input.
Play only signals from digital audio input.
Play only signals from analog audio input.
Only signals input from the 7.1CH IN connector will be played back.

o Decode Mode

Set the audio decode mode for input source.
It is normally recommended to set the audio input mode to "Auto". But we recommend changing it to "PCM" or "DTS" if the start of the source is clipped or noise occurs.

Auto (Default):
PCM:
DTS:

Detect type of digital audio input signal and decode and play automatically.
Decode and play only PCM input signals.
Decode and play only DTS input signals.

0 This item can be set for input sources for which "HDMI" or "DIGITAL" is assigned at "Input Assign". (v p. 200)

0 If "HDMI Control" is set to "On" and a TV compatible with the ARC is connected via the HDMI MONITOR connectors, the input mode whose input source is "TV Audio" is fixed to ARC.
0 The sound mode cannot be set if the input mode is set to "7.1CH IN".

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

204

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Speakers
The acoustic characteristics of the connected speakers and listening room are measured and the optimum settings are made automatically. This is called "Audyssey® Setup". You do not have to perform Audyssey® Setup when you have already performed "Speaker Calibration" in "Setup Assistant". To set up the speakers manually, use "Manual Setup" on the menu. (v p. 216)

Audyssey® Setup
To perform measurement, place the Sound calibration microphone in multiple locations all around the listening area. For best results, we recommend you measure in six or more positions, as shown in the illustration (up to eight positions). When measuring the second and subsequent positions, install the Sound calibration microphone within 2 ft (60 cm) of the first measurement position (main listening position).

FL SW C

FR

( :Measuring positions)

FL Front speaker (L) FR Front speaker (R) C Center speaker SW Subwoofer SL Surround speaker (L) SR Surround speaker (R)

0 If you perform the Audyssey® Setup, the Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey Dynamic EQ®, Audyssey Dynamic Volume® and Audyssey LFCTM functions are enabled. (v p. 180)

SL

Listening position

SR

.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

205

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o About the main listening position
The main listening position is the position where listeners would normally sit or where one would normally sit alone within the listening environment. Before starting Audyssey® Setup, place the Sound calibration microphone in the main listening position. Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 uses the measurements from this position to calculate speaker distance, level, polarity, and the optimum crossover value for the subwoofer.
o About Audyssey Sub EQ HTTM
Audyssey Sub EQ HTTM makes the integration of dual subwoofers seamless by first compensating for any level and delay differences between the two subwoofers and then applying Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 to both subwoofers together. To run Audyssey Sub EQ HTTM you must select "Measure (2 spkrs)" in "Channel Select". (v p. 208).

Settings

Tips

Appendix

NOTE
0 Make the room as quiet as possible. Background noise can disrupt the room measurements. Close windows and turn off the power on electronic devices (radios, air conditioners, fluorescent lights, etc.). The measurements could be affected by the sounds emitted by such devices.
0 During the measurement process, place cell phones outside the listening room. Cell phone signals could disrupt the measurements.
0 Do not stand between the speakers and Sound calibration microphone or allow obstacles in the path while the measurements are being made. Also, install the Sound calibration microphone at least 20 inches (50 cm) away from the wall. Failure to do so will result in inaccurate readings.
0 During the measurement process, audible test tones will come from the speakers and subwoofer(s), but this is part of normal operation. If there is background noise in the room, these test signals will increase in volume.
0 Operating VOLUME d f on the remote control unit or VOLUME on the main unit during the measurements will cancel the measurements.
0 Measurement cannot be performed when headphones are connected. Unplug the headphones before performing Audyssey® Setup.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

206

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Procedure for speaker settings (Audyssey® Setup)
Preparation

Measurement

Calculation & Store

Check

Finish
.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

1 Attach the Sound calibration microphone to the supplied microphone stand or own tripod and install it at the main listening position. When installing the Sound calibration microphone, point the tip of the microphone toward the ceiling and adjust the height to match the height of the ears of a listener in a seated position.
2 If using a subwoofer capable of the following adjustments, set up the subwoofer as shown below. n When using a subwoofer with a direct mode
Set the direct mode to "On" and disable the volume adjustment and crossover frequency setting.
n When using a subwoofer without a direct mode
Make the following settings: 0 Volume : 12 o'clock position 0 Crossover frequency : Maximum/Highest Frequency 0 Low pass filter : Off 0 Standby mode : Off

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

207

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

3 Connect the Sound calibration microphone to the SETUP MIC jack of this unit.

When the Sound calibration microphone is connected, the following screen is displayed.
.
Audyssey Setup Your AV receiver can automatically measure the acoustics of your room then optimize your speakers using the included microphone and microphone stand. Set the following items if necessary.
Amp Assign Channel Select Dolby Speaker Setup
Start
.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

4 Select "Start", then press ENTER. Audyssey® Setup can also make the following settings. 0 Amp Assign The signals output from the SURROUND BACK, FRONT WIDE and HEIGHT1 speaker terminals can be switched in accordance with your speaker environment. ("Amp Assign" (v p. 216)) 0 Channel Select If channels that are not to be used are set in advance, measurement for the set channels is skipped, and measuring time can be reduced. You can also change the number of surround back speakers and subwoofer. 0 Dolby Speaker Setup Set the distance between the Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker and the ceiling. This can be set when using the Front Dolby Atmos Enabled, Surround Dolby Atmos Enabled or Back Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker.
5 Follow the instructions on the screen display and press "Next" to proceed further.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

208

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

6 When the following screen is displayed, select "Begin Test" and then press ENTER. Start the measurement of the first position.
Audyssey Setup Select "Begin Test" to start the calibration. NOTE: You will hear a series of loud chirps starting and stopping during the tests.
Ear Height

Settings

Tips

Appendix

7 When the detected speaker is displayed, select "Next" and then press ENTER.

Audyssey Setup Speaker Detection

Front Center Subwoofer Surround

:Yes :Yes :Yes :Yes

Back

Begin Test

.
0 Measurement requires several minutes.

NOTE
0 If "Caution!" is displayed on TV screen: 0 Go to "Error messages" (v p. 213). Check any related items, and perform the necessary procedures. 0 If the volume level for the subwoofer is not appropriate, an error message is displayed. See "Subwoofer level error message and how to adjust" (v p. 214).

Repeat Last Test
.

Next

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

209

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

8 Move the Sound calibration microphone to position 2, select "Continue", then press ENTER. The measurement of the second position starts. Measurements can be made in up to eight positions.
Audyssey Setup Place the microphone ear level at the 2nd listening position, which should be no more than 2 ft (60cm) away from the 1st position, then select "Continue"...
Ear Height

Settings

Tips

Appendix

9 Repeat step 8, measuring positions 3 to 8.
0 To skip measuring the fourth and subsequent listening position, press o to select "Complete" and press ENTER to proceed to step 11.
10 Select "Continue", then press ENTER.
Audyssey Setup Measurements complete. Select Continue to analyze the data...

Back

Continue

.

n Stopping Audyssey® Setup

A Press BACK to display the popup screen. B Press o to select "Yes", then press ENTER.

Repeat Last Test

Continue

.

Start the analysis and storage of the measurement results.

0 Analysis takes several minutes to complete. The more speakers and measurement positions that there are, the more time it takes to perform the analysis.

NOTE
0 When the measurement results are being saved, make sure the power is not turned off.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

210

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

11 Perform the settings for Audyssey Dynamic EQ® and Audyssey Dynamic Volume®. The following screen is displayed during the analysis. Configure the settings as preferred.
Audyssey Setup Audyssey Dynamic EQ maintains bass, clarity and surround sound at low volumes letting you enjoy late-night movies and television.
Turn on the Dynamic EQ?
Yes No
Analyzing room data 50%
.
0 Dynamic EQ corrects the frequency response in consideration of the audio characteristics of the room and human hearing ability so that sound can be heard even at low volume. This is recommended when using the unit with the volume turned down, e.g. when enjoying a movie or TV program in the middle of the night.
0 Dynamic Volume adjusts the output volume to the optimal level while constantly monitoring the level of the audio input to the unit. Optimal volume control is performed automatically without any loss in the dynamism and clarity of the sound when, for example, the volume suddenly increases for commercials shown during television programs.

12 When the analysis and storage ends, unplug the Sound calibration microphone from the SETUP MIC jack on the main unit and then press "Next".
Audyssey Setup Now Analyzing and correcting the your room data. Please disconnect the microphone from your AV receiver.

Applying room corrections Back

100% Next

.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

211

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

13 Select "Details" and press ENTER to verify the measurement results. 0 Subwoofers may measure a greater reported distance than the actual distance due to added electrical delay common in subwoofers.
NOTE 0 Do not change the speaker connection or subwoofer volume after Audyssey®
Setup. If these are changed, run Audyssey® Setup again in order to configure the optimum equalizer settings.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

212

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Error messages

An error message is displayed if Audyssey® Setup could not be completed due to speaker placement, the measurement environment, etc. If an error message is displayed, check the relevant items and perform the necessary measures. Be sure to turn off the power before checking speaker connections.

Examples

Error details

Measures

No speakers found.

0 Sound calibration microphone is not detected.

0 Connect the included Sound calibration microphone to the SETUP MIC jack of this unit.

0 Not all speakers could be detected.

0 Check the speaker connections.

Ambient noise is too high or level is too 0 There is too much noise in the room. low

0 Either turn off any device generating noise or move it away. 0 Perform again when the surroundings are quieter.

0 Speaker or subwoofer sound is too low.

0 Check the speaker installation and the direction in which the speakers are facing.

0 Adjust the subwoofer's volume.

Front R : None

0 The displayed speaker could not be detected.

0 Check the connections of the displayed speaker.

Front R : Phase

0 The displayed speaker is connected with the polarity reversed.

0 Check the polarity of the displayed speaker.
0 For some speakers, this error message may be displayed even if the speaker is properly connected. If you are sure the connection is correct, press p to select "Ignore", then press ENTER.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

213

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Subwoofer level error message and how to adjust
The optimal level of each subwoofer channel for Audyssey® Setup measurement is 75 dB. During subwoofer level measurement, an error message is displayed when one level of subwoofers is outside the 72 ­ 78 dB range. When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (active type), adjust the subwoofer volume so that the subwoofer level is within the 72 to 78 dB range.
G Error message H
Audyssey Setup Your Subwoofer 1's level is too high. If your subwoofer has a volume control on it, select "SW Level Matching" to interactively adjust the level of your subwoofer.
If your subwoofer does not have a volume control, or if you do not want to use a subwoofer, select "Skip".

Settings

Tips

Appendix

1 Select "SW Level Matching" and then press ENTER. 2 Adjust the volume control on your subwoofer so that
the measured level is within the 72 to 78 dB range.
3 When the measured level is within the 72 to 78 dB range, select "Next" and then press ENTER. 0 If you use two subwoofers, the second subwoofer's adjustment will be started. Repeat the operation from step 2, 3.

Back
.

Skip

SW Level Matching

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

214

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Retrieving Audyssey® Setup settings
If you set "Restore..." to "Restore", you can return to Audyssey® Setup measurement result (value calculated at the start by MultEQ® XT32) even when you have changed each setting manually.
Audyssey Setup Your AV receiver can automatically measure the acoustics of your room then optimize your speakers using the included microphone and microphone stand. Set the following items if necessary.
Amp Assign Channel Select Dolby Speaker Setup Check Results
Restore...
Start
.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

215

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Manual Setup
Perform when setting the speakers manually or when changing settings made in Audyssey® Setup. 0 If you change the speaker settings after performing Audyssey® Setup,
you will no longer be able to select Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey Dynamic EQ® or Audyssey Dynamic Volume®. (v p. 180) 0 "Manual Setup" can be used without changing the settings. Please set if necessary.

Amp Assign
Select the power amplifier usage method to match your speaker system.
o Assign Mode
Select how to use the power amp. You need to configure the detailed settings for the speaker configuration in accordance with the selected mode. Select Assign Mode configure the corresponding detailed settings.

Settings 9.1ch : 7.1ch :

Tips

Appendix

0 Setting to use the 7-channel power amplifier within this unit and an external power amplifier connected to PRE OUT connector to play back up to 9.1-channels.
0 You can connect speakers for up to 13.1-channels for MAIN ZONE.
Speakers to output audio are automatically switched for playing back up to 9.1-channels in accordance with the input signal and sound mode.
0 Settings to assign all power amplifier within this unit to MAIN ZONE to play back up to 7.1-channels.
0 You can connect speakers for up to 11.1-channels for MAIN ZONE.
Speakers to output audio are automatically switched for playing back up to 7.1-channels in accordance with the input signal and sound mode.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

216

Remote

Index

Contents 5.1ch + ZONE2 (Default): 5.1ch (Bi-Amp) :
7.1ch/2ch Front :
5.1ch + Front B :

Connections

Playback

0 Setting to assign the power amplifiers in this unit for ZONE2 to 2-channels.
0 Setting to assign the power amplifiers in this unit for front speaker bi-amp connection to 2-channels.
0 Setting to assign the power amplifiers in this unit for connecting 2-channel playback speakers to 2-channels.
0 You can switch the front speakers when using 2-channel playback in direct mode or stereo mode, or when using multi-channel surround playback.
0 Setting to assign the power amplifiers within this unit for connecting the second set of front speakers.
0 You can switch between the desired combination of front speakers A and front speakers B.
Switch the front speaker using the "Front Speaker" setting. (v p. 231)

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Floor n Layout

Select the floor speakers location.

5ch & SB & FWz1
5ch & SBz2 (Default)

This layout combines a surround back or front wide speaker with the basic 5channel layout.
This layout combines a surround back speaker with the basic 5-channel layout.

5ch & FWz1

This layout combines a front wide speaker with the basic 5-channel layout.

5chz2

This is a basic 5-channel layout that uses front speakers, center speakers and surround speakers.

z1 This can be selected when "Assign Mode" is set to "9.1ch" or "7.1ch" in the menu. (v p. 216)
z2 This can be selected when "Assign Mode" is set to "9.1ch", "7.1ch" or "7.1ch/2ch Front" in the menu. (v p. 216)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

217

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Height n Height Sp

Select the number of the height speakers and ceiling speakers used in MAIN ZONE.

None

Uses no height and ceiling speakers.

2ch (Default)

Uses a set of (two) height speakers or ceiling speakers.

4ch

Uses two sets of (four) height speakers or ceiling speakers.

n Dolby Sp

Select the number of the Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers used in MAIN ZONE.

None (Default)

Uses no Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers.

2ch

Uses a set of (two) Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers.

4ch

Uses two sets of (four) Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

218

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

n Layout

Select the height, ceiling, or Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker location. The layouts that can be selected differ depending on the combinations of "Assign Mode" and "Floor" - "Layout" in the menu. ("Assign Mode" (v p. 216), "Floor" - "Layout" (v p. 217))

Settings

AUDIO OUT connectors

Height Speakers Dolby Speakers

NOTE

Layout

HEIGHT1

HEIGHT2

None

None

-

-

-

Front Height (Default)

Front Height

-

Top Front

Top Front

-

2ch

None

Top Middle

Top Middle

-

Top Rear

Top Rear

-

Rear Height

Rear Height

-

Front Height & Top Middle

Front Height

Top Middle

Front Height & Top Rear

Front Height

Top Rear

4ch

None

z1

Front Height & Rear Height Top Front & Top Rear

Front Height Top Front

Rear Height Top Rear

Top Front & Rear Height

Top Front

Rear Height

Top Middle & Rear Height

Top Middle

Rear Height

Front Dolby

Front Dolby

-

None

2ch

Surround Dolby Back Dolbyz2

Surround Dolby

-

Back Dolby

-

z1 This can be selected when "Assign Mode" is set to "9.1ch" in the menu. z2 This can be selected when "Assign Mode" is set to "9.1ch" and "Floor" - "Layout" is set to "5ch & SB & FW" or "5ch & SB" in the menu.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

219

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Height Speakers Dolby Speakers

Settings NOTE

2ch

2ch

z1

None

4ch

z1

z1 This can be selected when "Assign Mode" is set to "9.1ch" in the menu.

Layout Front Dolby & Top Rear Front Dolby & Rear Height Front Height & Surr. Dolby Top Front & Surround Dolby Front Dolby & Surround Dolby

Tips

Appendix

AUDIO OUT connectors

HEIGHT1

HEIGHT2

Front Dolby

Top Rear

Front Dolby

Rear Height

Front Height

Surround Dolby

Top Front

Surround Dolby

Front Dolby

Surround Dolby

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

220

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Pre-out
When "Assign Mode" is set to "9.1ch", selects the PRE OUT connect the external power amplifier used in MAIN ZONE. The PRE OUT connectors that can be selected differ depending on the combination of "Floor" - "Layout" and "Height" - "Layout" settings configured in the menu.

Surr. Back (Default)
Front Wide:
Front:
HEIGHT1 z1:
HEIGHT2 z2:
Surround Back & HEIGHT2 z2: Front Wide & HEIGHT2 z2:

The surround back left and right pre-amp outputs are connected to an external amplifier.
The front wide left and right pre-amp outputs are connected to an external amplifier.
The front left and right pre-amp outputs are connected to an external amplifier.
The HEIGHT1 left and right pre-amp outputs are connected to an external amplifier.
The HEIGHT2 left and right pre-amp outputs are connected to an external amplifier.
The surround back/HEIGHT2 left and right pre-amp outputs are connected to an external amplifier.
The front wide/HEIGHT2 left and right pre-amp outputs are connected to an external amplifier.

HEIGHT1 & HEIGHT2 z1z2:
Front & HEIGHT2 z2:
Front & Front Wide :

The HEIGHT1/HEIGHT2 left and right pre-amp outputs are connected to an external amplifier.
The front/HEIGHT2 left and right pre-amp outputs are connected to an external amplifier.
The front/front wide left and right pre-amp outputs are connected to an external amplifier.

z1 The name of the speaker set for "HEIGHT1" is displayed in "Height" - "Layout" in the menu.
z2 The name of the speaker set for "HEIGHT2" is displayed in "Height" - "Layout" in the menu.
o View Terminal Config.
This shows how to connect the speaker terminals and PRE OUT connectors for your "Amp Assign" setting on the menu screen.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

221

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Speaker Config.
Select whether or not speakers are present, playback capacity for low bass frequencies and speaker size.

0 When speakers for which you assigned Height1 in "Amp Assign" are set to "None", "None" is automatically set for Height2.

o Front

Set the front speaker size.

Large (Default):
Small:

Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.
Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.

0 When "Subwoofer" is set to "No", "Front" is automatically set to "Large".
0 When "Front" is set to "Small", you cannot set speakers other than "Front" to "Large".

o Center

Set the presence and size of the center speaker.

Large:
Small (Default):
None:

Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.
Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.
Select when a center speaker is not connected.

o Subwoofer

Set the presence of a subwoofer.

2 spkrs: 1 spkr (Default):
None:

Use two subwoofers.
Use only one subwoofer.
Select when a subwoofer is not connected.

0 When "Subwoofer" is set to "None" and you set "Front" to "Small", "Subwoofer" is automatically set to "1 spkr".

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

222

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Surround

Set the presence and size of the surround speakers.

Large:
Small (Default):
None:

Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.
Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.
Select when the surround speakers are not connected.

0 When "Surround" is set to "None", "Surr. Back", "Front Wide", "Surround Dolby" and "Back Dolby" are automatically set to "None".

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Surr. Back

Set the presence, size and number of surround back speakers.

Large:
Small (Default):
None:

Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.
Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.
Select when the surround back speakers are not connected.

2 spkrs (Default):
1 spkr:

Use two surround back speakers.
Use only one surround back speaker. Connect to the L terminal to SURROUND BACK when this setting is selected.

0 When "Surr. Back" is set to "None" or "1 spkr", "Back Dolby" is automatically set to "None".

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

223

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Front Wide

Set the presence and size of the front wide speakers.

Large:
Small (Default):
None:

Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.
Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.
Select when the front wide speakers are not connected.

o Front Height

Set the presence and size of the front height speakers.

Large:
Small (Default):
None:

Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.
Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.
Select when the front height speakers are not connected.

o Front Dolby

Set the presence and size of the front Dolby speakers.

Large:
Small (Default):
None:

Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.
Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.
Select when the front Dolby speakers are not connected.

o Top Front

Set the presence and size of the top front speakers.

Large:
Small (Default):
None:

Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.
Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.
Select when the top front speakers are not connected.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

224

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Top Middle

Set the presence and size of the top middle speakers.

Large:
Small (Default):
None:

Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.
Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.
Select when the top middle speakers are not connected.

o Surround Dolby

Set the presence and size of the surround Dolby speakers.

Large:
Small (Default):
None:

Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.
Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.
Select when the surround Dolby speakers are not connected.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Top Rear

Set the presence and size of the top rear speakers.

Large:
Small (Default):
None:

Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.
Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.
Select when the top rear speakers are not connected.

o Rear Height

Set the presence and size of the rear height speakers.

Large:
Small (Default):
None:

Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.
Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.
Select when the rear height speakers are not connected.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

225

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Back Dolby

Set the presence and size of the back Dolby speakers.

Large:
Small (Default):
None:

Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.
Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.
Select when the back Dolby speakers are not connected.

0 When speakers for which you assigned Height1 in "Amp Assign" are set to "None", "None" is automatically set for Height2.

Distances
Set distance from listening position to speakers. Measure beforehand the distance from the listening position to each speaker.
o Unit
Set the unit of distance. Feet (Default) Meters
o Step
Set the minimum variable width of the distance. 1 ft / 0.1 ft (Default: 1 ft) 0.1 m / 0.01 m

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

226

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

o Set the distance
0.0 ft ­ 60.0 ft / 0.00 m ­ 18.00 m

Playback

0 The speakers that can be selected differ depending on the "Amp Assign" and "Speaker Config." settings. ("Amp Assign" (v p. 216), "Speaker Config." (v p. 222))
0 Default settings: Front L / Front R / F. Height L / F. Height R / F. Wide L / F. Wide R / Center / F. Dolby L / F. Dolby R / Subwoofer 1 / Subwoofer 2: 12.0 ft (3.60 m) Speakers other than the above: 10.0 ft (3.00 m)
0 Set the difference in the distance between the speakers to less than 20.0 ft (6.00 m).

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Dolby Speaker Setup
Set the distance between the Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker and the ceiling.
3.0 ft - 11.0 ft / 0.90 m - 3.30 m(Default : 6.0 ft / 1.80 m)

0 This can be set when "Front Dolby", "Surround Dolby" or "Back Dolby" is set to "Large" or "Small" in "Speaker Config.".
o Set Defaults
The "Distances" settings are returned to the default settings.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

227

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Levels
Set the volume of the test tone to be the same at the listening position when it is output from each speaker.
o Test Tone Start
A test tone is output from the selected speaker. While listening to the test tone, adjust the volume output from the selected speaker.
­12.0 dB ­ +12.0 dB (Default : 0.0 dB)

0 The set "Levels" are reflected in all sound modes. 0 If you wish to adjust the channel level for each input source, carry out the
settings in "Channel Level Adjust". (v p. 132) 0 When headphones are connected to the PHONES connector on this unit, you
cannot set "Levels".
o Set Defaults
The "Levels" settings are returned to the default settings.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

228

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Crossovers

Set in accordance with the lower limit frequency of the base frequencies that can be played back through each speaker. See the speaker manual for information concerning speaker crossover frequency.

o Speaker Selection

Selects how to set the crossover frequency.

All (Default):
Individual:

Sets the same crossover frequency for all speakers.
Selects the crossover points for each speaker individually.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Set the crossover frequency
40 Hz / 60 Hz / 80 Hz / 90 Hz / 100 Hz / 110 Hz / 120 Hz / 150 Hz / 200 Hz / 250 Hz (Default : 80 Hz)

0 "Crossovers" can be set when the "Subwoofer Mode" setting is "LFE+Main", or when you have a speaker that is set to "Small". (v p. 230)
0 The default crossover frequency is "80 Hz", which will work best with the widest variety of speakers. We recommend setting to a higher frequency that the crossover frequency when small speakers are used. For example, set to "250 Hz" when the frequency range of the speakers is 250 Hz ­ 20 kHz.
0 Sound below the crossover frequency is cut off from the output of the speakers set in "Small". This cut off bass frequency is output from the subwoofer or front speakers.
0 The speakers that can be set when "Individual" is selected differ depending on to the "Subwoofer Mode" setting. (v p. 230)
0 When "LFE" is selected, speakers set to "Small" at "Speaker Config." can be set. If the speakers are set to "Large", "Full Band" is displayed and the setting cannot be made. (v p. 222)
0 When "LFE+Main" is selected, speakers can be set regardless of the "Speaker Config." setting. (v p. 222)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

229

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Bass

Set subwoofer and LFE signal range playback.

o Subwoofer Mode

Select low range signals to be reproduced by subwoofer.

LFE (Default):
LFE+Main:

The low range signal of the channel set to "Small" speaker size is added to the LFE signal output from the subwoofer.
The low range signal of all channels is added to the LFE signal output from the subwoofer.

o LPF for LFE
Set LFE signal playback range. Set this when you want to change the playback frequency (low pass filter point) of the subwoofer.
80 Hz / 90 Hz / 100 Hz / 110 Hz / 120 Hz / 150 Hz / 200 Hz / 250 Hz (Default : 120 Hz)

0 "Subwoofer Mode" can be set when "Speaker Config." - "Subwoofer" in the menu is set to other than "None". (v p. 222)
0 Play music or a movie source and select the mode offering the strongest bass.
0 If "Speaker Config." - "Front" and "Center" are set to "Large", and "Subwoofer Mode" is set to "LFE", no sound may be output from the subwoofers, depending on the input signal or selected sound mode. (v p. 222) Select "LFE+Main" if you want the bass signals to always be produced from the subwoofer.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

230

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Front Speaker

Set the front speaker A/B to use for every sound mode.

A (Default):

Front speaker A is used.

B :

Front speaker B is used.

A+B :

Both front speakers A and B are used.

0 This can be set when "Assign Mode" is set to "5.1ch + Front B". (v p. 217)

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

231

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Network
To use this unit by connecting it to a home network (LAN), you must configure network settings. If you set up your home network (LAN) via DHCP, set "DHCP" to "On". (Use the default setting.) This allows this unit to use your home network (LAN). When assigning an IP address to each device manually, you need to assign an IP address to this unit using the "IP Address" settings, and enter information about your home network (LAN) such as the gateway address and subnet mask, etc.

Information
Display network information. Friendly Name / Connection / SSID / DHCP / IP Address / MAC Address
0 MAC Address is required to create a vTuner account.

Connection
Choose whether to connect the home network to a wireless LAN or a wired LAN. When connecting to the network using wired LAN, select "Wired (Ethernet)" after connecting a LAN cable, When connecting to the network using wireless LAN, select "Wireless (WiFi)" and configure the "Wi-Fi Setup". (v p. 233)

o Wi-Fi
You can stop the Wi-Fi function when connecting this unit to the network using Wired LAN.

Enabled (Default):
Disabled:

The Wi-Fi function is used. The Wi-Fi function is stopped.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

232

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Connect Using

Select the method for connecting to the home network (LAN).

Wired (Ethernet): Wireless (Wi-Fi):

Use a LAN cable to connect to a network. Use the wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) function to connect to a network.

0 This can be set when "Wi-Fi" is set to "Enabled". (v p. 232)

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Wi-Fi Setup
Connect to a wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) router. The router can be connected in the following ways. Select the connection method to suit your home environment.
o Scan Networks
Select the network you wish to connect to from the list of possible networks shown on the TV screen. 1. Select the network you wish to connect to from the list of wireless
networks. Select "Rescan" if the network cannot be found. 2. Enter your password and select "OK".
o Use iOS Device
Use your iOS device (iPhone/iPod/iPad) to connect to the network. By connecting your iOS device to this unit, the unit can be automatically connected to the same network as your device. This unit can be connected to your iOS device in two ways, using a USB cable and using Wi-Fi.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

233

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

n When connecting using Wi-Fi
1. Select "Wireless connection" on the TV screen. 2. Check that your iOS device is connected to the wireless LAN
(Wi-Fi) router and select "Marantz SR6010" from "SET UP NEW AIRPLAY SPEAKER..." at the bottom of the Wi-Fi configuration screen of your iOS device. 3. Tap "Next" on the screen of the iOS device.

0 The iOS device firmware version needs to support iOS 7 or later.
n When using a USB cable
1. Select "USB cable" on the TV screen. 2. Check that your iOS device is connected to the wireless LAN
(Wi-Fi) and connect it to the USB port on the front panel using a USB cable. 3. Select "Connect" on the TV screen. 4. Tap "Allow" when the connection message appears on the screen of your iOS device.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o WPS Router
Use a WPS-compatible router to connect. There are two ways to connect, using the push button method or the PIN code method. Select the connection method to match your router.
n When connecting using the push button method
1. Select "Push Button" on the TV screen. 2. Switch to the WPS mode by pressing the WPS button of the
router you wish to connect to. 0 The time for pressing the button varies depending on the
router. 3. Select "Connect" on the TV screen within 2 minutes.
n When connecting using the PIN code method
1. Select "PIN" on the TV screen. 2. Register the PIN code of the unit in the router.

0 The iOS device firmware version needs to support iOS 5 or later.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

234

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Manual

Enter the name (SSID) and password of the network you wish to connect to.
1. Set the following items.

SSID: Security: Password: Default Key:

Input the name of the wireless network (SSID).
Select the encryption method according to the encryption setting of the access point you are using.
Input the password.
Select the Default Key. When connecting to a "WEP" encrypted network, "Default Key" menu is displayed.

2. Select "Connect" at the end of the setting.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

0 The wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) settings of this unit can also be configured from a PC or tablet that supports wireless LAN connection.
0 When using a device that has a firmware version of iOS 7 or later, "When connecting using Wi-Fi" (v p. 234) in "Use iOS Device".
1. Press and hold the ZONE2 SOURCE and TUNER PRESET CH + buttons on the main unit for at least 3 seconds when the power of the unit is on.
2. Connect the wireless LAN of the PC or tablet used to "Marantz SR6010" when the message "Connect your Wi-Fi device to Wi-Fi network called "Marantz SR6010"" appears in the display.
3. Start up the browser and enter "192.168.1.16" in the URL. 4. Use the browser to enter the settings, select "Connect" and then exit the
settings.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

235

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings
Configure the proxy settings and IP address. 0 If you are using a broadband router (DHCP function), the information
required for network connection such as the IP address will be automatically configured since the DHCP function is set to "On" in the default settings of this unit. 0 Set up the IP Address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway and DNS server information only when assigning a fixed IP address or when connecting to a network without DHCP function. 0 Configure the proxy settings when using a proxy server to connect to the Internet.

Network/Settings

DHCP

Off

-IP Address

192.168.001.002

-Subnet Mask

255.255.255.000

-Default Gateway

192.168.001.001

-Primary DNS

192.168.001.001

-Secondary DNS

000.000.000.000

Proxy

On(Address)

-Address

000.000.000.000

-Port

00000

Save

Cancel

Configures the network settings manually

.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o DHCP

Selects how to connect to the network.

On (Default):

Configure the network settings automatically from your router.

Off:

Configure the network settings manually.

o IP Address

Set the IP address within the ranges shown below. 0 The Network Audio function cannot be used if other IP addresses
are set. CLASS A:10.0.0.1 - 10.255.255.254 CLASS B:172.16.0.1 - 172.31.255.254 CLASS C:192.168.0.1 - 192.168.255.254

o Subnet Mask

When connecting an xDSL modem or connector adapter directly to this unit, input the subnet mask indicated in the documentation supplied by your provider. Normally input 255.255.255.0.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

236

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Default Gateway

When connected to a gateway (router), input its IP address.

o Primary DNS, Secondary DNS

If there is only one DNS address indicated in the documentation supplied by your provider, input it at "Primary DNS". If two or more DNS are provided by your provider, enter both "Primary DNS" and "Secondary DNS".
o Proxy

Make this setting when connecting to the Internet via a proxy server.
Make the proxy settings only when you connect to the Internet via a proxy server that is on your internal network or provided by your provider, etc.

On(Address):
On(Name):
Off (Default):

Select when inputting by address. Select when inputting by domain name.
Disables the proxy server.

Settings
o Port
Enter port number.

Tips

Appendix

0 If you cannot connect to the Internet, recheck the connections and settings. (v p. 75)
0 If you do not understand about Internet connection, contact your ISP (Internet Service Provider) or the store from which you purchased your computer.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

237

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Network Control

Enables network communication in standby power mode.

Off In Standby:

Suspend network function during standby.

Always On (Default):

Network is on during standby. Main unit operable with a network compatible controller.

0 When using the web control function or Marantz 2015 AVR Remote, use with the "IP Control" setting set to "Always On".
NOTE 0 When "Network Control" is set to "Always On", the unit consumes more standby
power.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Friendly Name
The Friendly Name is the name of this unit displayed on the network. You can change the Friendly Name according to your preferences.
o Friendly Name
Selects Friendly Name from the list. When you select "Other", you can change the Friendly Name according to your preferences.
Home Theater / Living Room / Family Room / Guest Room / Kitchen / Dining Room / Master Bedroom / Bedroom / Den / Office / Other

0 Up to 63 characters can be input. For character input, see "Using the keyboard screen" (v p. 172).
0 The default Friendly Name on first use is "Marantz SR6010".
o Set Defaults
Restores Friendly Name, which you had changed, to the default setting.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

238

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Diagnostics

Used to check the network connection.

o Physical Connection

Checks the physical LAN port connection.

OK Error:

The LAN cable is not connected. Check the connection.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Internet Access

Checks whether this unit has access to the Internet (WAN).

OK Error:

Failed to connect to the Internet. Check the Internet connection environment or router settings.

0 When connected using a wireless LAN, "Connection be displayed.
o Router Access

Wireless (Wi-Fi)" will

Checks the connection from this unit to the router.

OK Error:

Failed to communicate with the router. Check the router settings.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

239

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Maintenance Mode
Use when receiving maintenance from a Marantz service engineer or custom installer. Ordinarily, this mode isn't suitable for use by the end user, only by a trained service technician or custom installation professional.
NOTE 0 Only use this function if so instructed by a Marantz serviceperson or installer.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

240

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

General
Make various other settings.

Language
Set the language for display the menu on the TV screen.
English / Français / Español (Default : English)
0 "Language" can also be set up by the following operation. However, the menu screen is not displayed. Watch the display while configuring the settings. 1. Press and hold the main unit's ZONE2 SOURCE and STATUS at the same time for at least 3 seconds. "Video Format <NTSC>" appears on the display. 2. Press the main unit's DIMMER. "GUI Language ENGLISH" appears on the display. 3. Use the main unit's TUNER PRESET CH + or TUNER PRESET CH - and set the language. 4. Press the main unit's STATUS to complete the setting.

ECO

Configure the settings of the ECO Mode and auto standby mode.

o ECO Mode

This mode can reduce the power consumption when the power of the unit is on.

On:
Auto:
Off (Default):

Reduce the power consumption. The power consumption is automatically reduced to match the volume.
Do not reduce the power consumption.

0 When you want to output audio at a high volume level, it is recommended to set "ECO Mode" to "Off".
0 Eco mode can also be switched by pressing ECO G on the remote control unit.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

241

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Power On Default

Set the mode to ECO when the power is on.

Last (Default): On:
Auto:
Off:

The ECO Mode will be set to the previous setting before the power was switched off.
When power is turned on, the mode will always be switched to the ECO Mode in "On".
When power is turned on, the mode will always be switched to the ECO Mode in "Auto".
When power is turned on, the mode will always be switched to the ECO Mode in "Off".

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o On Screen Display

Display the power consumption of this unit using a meter on the TV screen.

Always On:
Auto (Default): Off:

Always display the meter on the TV screen.
Display the meter when changing the mode or volume.
Do not display the meter.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

242

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Auto Standby

Set so the unit power automatically switches to standby.
n MAIN ZONE

Sets the time for switching to auto standby when there are no audio or video signals input into this unit. Before the unit enters standby mode, "Auto Standby" is displayed on the unit display and the menu screen.

60 min: 30 min: 15 min: Off (Default):

The unit goes into standby after 60 minutes. The unit goes into standby after 30 minutes. The unit goes into standby after 15 minutes. The unit does not go into standby automatically.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

n ZONE2

When there are no operations for a certain period of time as set here, the power is automatically shut off even if there is audio or video input.

8 hours:

Put ZONE2 in the standby state after about 8 hours.

4 hours:

Put ZONE2 in the standby state after about 4 hours.

2 hours:

Put ZONE2 in the standby state after about 2 hours.

Off (Default):

Do not automatically put ZONE2 in the standby state.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

243

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

ZONE2 Setup
Makes settings for audio playback with ZONE2.

0 Values set for "Volume Limit" and "Power On Volume" are displayed according to the setting specified for the volume "Scale". (v p. 178)

o Bass
Adjust bass. -14dB ­ +14dB (Default : 0dB)

o Treble
Adjust treble. -14dB ­ +14dB (Default : 0dB)

o High Pass Filter

Make settings for cutting the low range to reduce distortion in the bass.

On:
Off (Default):

The low range is attenuated. The low range is not attenuated.

o Lch Level
Adjust the left channel output level. -12 dB ­ +12 dB (Default : 0 dB)

o Rch Level
Adjust the right channel output level. -12 dB ­ +12 dB (Default : 0 dB)

o Channel

Set whether to playback in stereo or monaural.

Stereo (Default):
Mono:

Stereo playback. Monaural playback.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

244

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o HDMI Audio

Selects the audio signal format for playing an HDMI source in ZONE2.

Through (Default):
PCM:

The HDMI audio signal is passed through this unit to the device in ZONE2.
The HDMI audio signal input into this unit is converted to a PCM signal that can be output from the ZONE2 PRE OUT connectors or speaker terminals.

o Volume Level

Set the volume output level.

Variable (Default):
1 ­ 98 (­79.5 dB ­ 18.0 dB):

Volume can be adjusted.
Volume is fixed at the desired level. The volume cannot be adjusting using the remote control unit.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Volume Limit

Make a setting for maximum volume.

60 (-20 dB) / 70 (-10 dB) / 80 (0 dB) (Default : 70 (-10 dB))

Off:

Do not set a maximum volume.

0 This can be set when "Volume Level" is set to "Variable". (v p. 245)
o Power On Volume

Define the volume setting that is active when the power is turned on.

Last (Default):
Mute:
1 ­ 98 (­79.5 dB ­ 18.0 dB):

Use the memorized setting from the last session. Always use the muting on condition.
The volume is adjusted to the set level.

0 This can be set when "Volume Level" is set to "Variable". (v p. 245)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

245

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Mute Level

Set the amount of attenuation when muting is on.

Full (Default):
­40 dB :
­20 dB :

The sound is muted entirely.
The sound is attenuated by 40 dB down. The sound is attenuated by 20 dB down.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Zone Rename

Change the display title of each zone to one you prefer.

MAIN ZONE / ZONE2 Set Defaults:

The default setting is restored for the edited zone name.

0 Up to 10 characters can be input. For character input, see "Using the keyboard screen" (v p. 172).

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

246

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Smart Select Names

Change the smart select name that appears on the TV screen to one you prefer.

Smart Select 1 / Smart Select 2 / Smart Select 3 / Smart Select 4

Set Defaults:

The default setting is restored for the edited smart select name.

0 Up to 16 characters can be input. For character input, see "Using the keyboard screen" (v p. 172).

Trigger Out
Select the conditions for activating trigger out. For details about how to connect the DC OUT jack, see "DC OUT jack" (v p. 78).
n When setting for zone (MAIN ZONE/ZONE2)
Trigger out is activated through linkage to the power of the zone set to "On".
n When setting for input source
Activate trigger out when the input source set to "On" is selected.

On: ­ ­ ­:

Activate trigger on this mode. Do not activate trigger on this mode.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

247

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Front Display

Makes settings related to the display on this unit.

o Dimmer

Adjust the display brightness of this unit.

Bright (Default): Dim: Dark: Off:

Normal display brightness.
Reduced display brightness. Very low display brightness. Turns the display off.

0 You can also adjust the display by pressing DIMMER on the main unit.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

248

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Firmware

Checks for the latest firmware information about updates and upgrades, updates the firmware, and sets up the notification message display for updates and upgrades.

o Update

Updates the firmware of this unit.

Update:

Execute the update process. When the update starts, the menu screen is shut down. During the update, the progress is shown on the display.

0 This unit automatically retries updating if updating fails. If the update still fails, either one of the following messages will appear on the screen. If the display reads as shown below, check the settings and network environment, then update again.

Display Updating fail Login failed Server is busy Connect fail Download fail

Description Updating failed. Failure to log into server. Server is busy. Wait a while then try again. Failure in connecting to server. Downloading of the firmware has failed.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Notifications

When the latest firmware is available, a notification message is displayed on the TV screen at power on.
The notification message is displayed for about 40 seconds when the power is turned on.

Update

On (Default):
Off:

Display update message. Do not display update message.

Upgrade
On (Default): Off:

Display upgrade message. Do not display upgrade message.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

249

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Add New Feature

Display new features that can be downloaded to this unit and perform an upgrade.

Upgrade Package: Upgrade Status:
Upgrade Start:

Display the items to be upgraded.
Display a list of the additional functions provided by the upgrade.
Execute the upgrade process. When the upgrade starts, the menu screen is shut down. During the upgrade, the amount of upgrade time which has elapsed is displayed.

0 See the Marantz website for details about upgrades.
0 When the procedure is complete, "Registered" is displayed in this menu and upgrades can be carried out. If the procedure has not been carried out, "-------" is displayed. The ID number shown on this screen is needed when carrying out the procedure. The ID number can also be displayed by pressing and holding the main unit's STATUS and SOUND MODE for at least 3 seconds.
0 If the upgrade is not successful, an error message identical to those in "Firmware" - "Update" will appear on the display. Check the settings and network environment and then perform the upgrade again.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Notes concerning use of "Update" and "Add New Feature"
0 In order to use these functions, you must have the correct system requirements and settings for an Internet connection. (v p. 75)
0 Do not turn off the power until updating or upgrading is completed.
0 Approximately 1 hour is required for the updating/upgrading procedure to be completed.
0 Once updating/upgrade starts, normal operations on this unit cannot be performed until updating/upgrading is completed. Furthermore, there may be cases where backup data is reset for the parameters, etc., set on this unit.
0 If the update or upgrade fails, press and hold the X on the main unit for more than 5 seconds, or remove and re-insert the power cord. "Update retry" appears on the display and update restarts from the point at which update failed. If the error continues despite this, check the network environment.

0 Information regarding the "Update" function and "Add New Feature" will be announced on the Marantz web site each time related plans are defined.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

250

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Information

Show information about this unit settings, input signals, etc.

o Audio

Show the audio information for MAIN ZONE.

Sound Mode: Input Signal: Format: Sample Rate: Offset:
Flag:

The currently set sound mode.
The input signal type.
The number of input signal channels (presence of front, surround, LFE).
The input signal's sampling frequency.
The dialogue normalization correction value.
This is displayed when inputting signals including a surround back channel. "MATRIX" is displayed with DTS-ES Matrix input signals, "DISCRETE" with DTS-ES Discrete signals.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Video
Show the HDMI input/output signals and HDMI monitor information for MAIN ZONE. HDMI Signal Info. Resolution / Color Space / Pixel Depth
HDMI Monitor Interface / Resolutions

o ZONE

Show information about current settings.

MAIN ZONE: ZONE2:

This item shows information about settings for MAIN ZONE. The information displayed differs according to the input source.
This item shows information about settings for ZONE2.

o Firmware
Version: DTS Version:

Displays information for the current firmware.
Displays the current DTS version.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

251

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Notifications

Displays and sets notifications.
Also, sets whether or not to display the notification when the power is turned on.

Notification Alerts

On (Default):
Off:

Notification messages are displayed. Notification messages are not displayed.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Usage Data

To help us improve our products and customer service, Marantz collects anonymous information about how you use your AV receiver (such as frequently used input sources and sound modes and speaker settings). Marantz will never provide any information we collect to third parties.

Yes:

Provide information on the operating status of this unit.

No:

Do not provide information on the operating status of this unit.

0 Press INFO on the remote control unit to display current source name, volume, sound mode name, and other information at the bottom of the screen.

SOURCE Blu-ray SOUND Dolby TrueHD SIGNAL Dolby TrueHD AUDYSSEY MultEQ XT32 : Reference
Dynamic EQ : On Dynamic Volume : Medium

INPUT SIGNAL

FHL LFE

EXT FHR

FWL FL C FR FWR

SL

SR

SBL SB SBR

.

ACTIVE SPEAKERS

SW

FL C FR

SL

SR

SBL

SBR

50.0

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

252

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Setup Lock

Protect settings from inadvertent changes.
o Lock

On:
Off (Default):

Turn protection on. Turn protection off.

0 When cancelling the setting, set "Lock" to "Off".
NOTE 0 When "Lock" is set to "On", no setting items are displayed except for "Setup
Lock".

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

253

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Limiting the operating zone with the remote control

ZONE2

ZONE SELECT

POWER

MAIN ZONE 2 SLEEP

CBL /SAT

DVD

GAME

AUX1

TV AUDIO

AUX2

Blu-ray MEDIA PLAYER TUNER

iPod/USB

CD

Bluetooth

ONLINE MUSIC

PHONO ECO

INTERNET RADIO

CH / PAGE

MUTE

VOLUME

ZONE2 operations can be disabled using the remote control.
1 Press and hold ZONE2 and SETUP. The MAIN and ZONE2 buttons blink.
o Canceling the settings
1 Press and hold ZONE2 and SETUP while configuring the setting. The MAIN and ZONE2 buttons blink and the setting is canceled.

INFO

OPTION

ENTER

BACK

SETUP

TUNE -

TUNE +

SMART SELECT
1234

SOUND MODE MOVIE MUSIC GAME

PURE

SETUP

.
Front panel

Display

Rear panel

254

Remote

Index

Contents
o Contents

Connections

Playback

Tips

I want the volume not to become too loud by mistake

256

I want to keep the volume at the same level when I turn the power on 256

I want to have the subwoofer always output audio

256

I want to make human voices in the movies clearer

256

I want to keep bass and clarity during playback at a lower volume

level

256

I want to automatically adjust the volume level difference in content

such as TV and movies

256

I want to set the optimized listening environment after changing the

configuration/position of the speakers or changing a speaker to a new

one

257

I want to combine a desired video with the current music

257

I want to skip unused input sources

257

I want to enjoy the same music in all zones at the home party, etc. 257

I want to minimize the delay in video signals when I'm playing a game

on my game console

257

I want to operate this unit using the TV remote control

257

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Troubleshooting

Power does not turn on / Power is turned off

259

Operations cannot be performed through the remote control unit

260

Display on this unit shows nothing

260

No sound comes out

261

Desired sound does not come out

262

Sound is interrupted or noise occurs

264

No video is shown on the TV

265

The menu screen is not displayed on the TV

267

iPod cannot be played back

268

USB memory devices cannot be played back

269

File names on the iPod/USB memory device are not displayed

properly

270

Bluetooth cannot be played back

270

The Internet radio cannot be played back

271

Music files on PC or NAS cannot be played back

272

Various online services cannot be played

272

The HDMI control function does not work

273

Cannot connect to a wireless LAN network

274

When using HDMI ZONE2, the devices does not function properly 275

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

255

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Tips
I want the volume not to become too loud by mistake 0 Set the volume upper limit for "Volume Limit" in the menu beforehand. This prevents children or others from increasing the volume too much by mistake.
You can set this for each zone. ("Volume" (v p. 178), "Volume Limit" (v p. 245)) I want to keep the volume at the same level when I turn the power on 0 By default, the volume setting when power was previously set to standby on this unit is applied at next power on with no change. To use a fixed volume
level, set the volume level at power on for "Power On Volume" in the menu. You can set this for each zone. ("Volume" (v p. 178), "Power On Volume" (v p. 245)) I want to have the subwoofer always output audio 0 Depending on the input signals and sound mode, the subwoofer may not output audio. When "Subwoofer Mode" in the menu is set to "LFE+Main", you can have the subwoofer always output audio. (v p. 230) I want to make human voices in the movies clearer 0 Use "Dialog Level Adjust" in the menu to adjust the level. (v p. 173) I want to keep bass and clarity during playback at a lower volume level 0 Set "Dynamic EQ" in the menu to "On". This setting corrects the frequency characteristics to allow you to enjoy clear sound without the bass being lost even during playback at a lower volume level. (v p. 181) I want to automatically adjust the volume level difference in content such as TV and movies 0 Set "Dynamic Volume" in the menu. Volume level changes (between quiet scenes and loud scenes) in TV shows or movies are automatically adjusted to your desired level. (v p. 182)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

256

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

I want to set the optimized listening environment after changing the configuration/position of the speakers or changing a speaker to a new one. 0 Perform Audyssey® Setup. This automatically makes the optimized speaker settings for the new listening environment. (v p. 205)
I want to combine a desired video with the current music 0 Set "Video Select" in the option menu to "On". You can combine the current music with your desired video source from a Set-top Box or DVD, etc. while
listening to music from the Tuner, CD, Phono, Internet radio, USB or Bluetooth. (v p. 134)
I want to skip unused input sources 0 Set unused input sources for "Hide Sources" in the menu. This allows you to skip unused input sources when turning the INPUT SELECTOR knob on
this unit. (v p. 203)
I want to enjoy the same music in all zones at the home party, etc. 0 Set "All Zone Stereo" in the option menu to "Start". This allows you to simultaneously play back the music that is being played back in MAIN ZONE in
ZONE2. (v p. 136)
I want to minimize the delay in video signals when I'm playing a game on my game console 0 When the video is delayed against button operations with the controller on the game console, set "Video Mode" in the menu to "Game". (v p. 194)
I want to operate this unit using the TV remote control 0 Select "AV Receiver" in a TV menu such as "Input"z or "Operate Connected HDMI Device"z. The Smart Menu of this unit is displayed on the TV. This
Smart Menu can be operated using the remote control of your TV. z The selection method differs depending on your TV. See the owner's manual of your TV for details.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

257

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Troubleshooting
If a problem should arise, first check the following: 1. Are the connections correct? 2. Is the set being operated as described in the owner's manual? 3. Are the other devices operating properly?
If this unit does not operate properly, check the corresponding symptoms in this section. If the symptoms do not match any of those described here, consult your dealer as it could be due to a fault in this unit. In this case, disconnect the power immediately and contact the store where you purchased this unit.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

258

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Power does not turn on / Power is turned off

Symptom

Cause / Solution

Power does not turn on. 0 Check whether the power plug is correctly inserted into the power outlet.

Power automatically turns off.

0 The sleep timer is set. Turn on the power again.
0 "Auto Standby" is set. "Auto Standby" is triggered when there is no operation for a set amount of time. To disable "Auto Standby", set "Auto Standby" on the menu to "Off".

Power turns off and the power indicator flashes in red approx. every 2 seconds.

0 The protection circuit has been activated due to a rise in temperature within this unit. Turn the power off, wait about an hour until this unit cools down sufficiently, and then turn the power on again.
0 Please re-install this unit in a place having good ventilation.

Power turns off and the power indicator flashes in red approx. every 0.5 seconds.

0 Check the speaker connections. The protection circuit may have been activated because speaker cable core wires came in contact with each other or a core wire was disconnected from the connector and came in contact with the rear panel of this unit. After unplugging the power cord, take corrective action such as firmly re-twisting the core wire or taking care of the connector, and then reconnect the wire.

0 Turn down the volume and turn on the power again.

0 This unit's amplifier circuit has failed. Unplug the power cord and contact our customer service center.

Power does not turn off even when the power button is pressed, and the display shows "ZONE2 On".

0 The power supply of ZONE2 is turned to ON. To turn off the power supply of this unit (standby), press the ZONE2 ON/OFF on the main unit, or press the POWER X button after pressing the ZONE2 button on the
remote control unit to turn off the power supply of ZONE2.

Page 79 153 243
302
 36
81  

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

259

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Operations cannot be performed through the remote control unit

Symptom

Cause / Solution

Operations cannot be performed through the remote control unit.

0 Batteries are worn out. Replace with new batteries.
0 Operate the remote control unit within a distance of about 23 ft/7 m from this unit and at an angle of within 30°.

0 Remove any obstacle between this unit and the remote control unit. 0 Insert the batteries in the proper direction, checking the q and w marks.

0 The set's remote control sensor is exposed to strong light (direct sunlight, inverter type fluorescent bulb light, etc.). Move the set to a place in which the remote control sensor will not be exposed to strong light.

0 The operation target zone does not correspond to the zone setting specified on the remote control unit. Press the MAIN or ZONE2 button to select the operating zone of the remote control.

0 When using a 3D video device, the remote control unit of this unit may not function due to effects of infrared communications between units (such as TV and glasses for 3D viewing). In this case, adjust the direction of units with the 3D communications function and their distance to ensure they do not affect operations from the remote control unit of this unit.

Page 8 8
 8 
170


o Display on this unit shows nothing

Symptom

Cause / Solution

Display is off.

0 Set "Dimmer" on the menu to something other than "Off".

0 When the sound mode is set to "Pure Direct", the display is off.

Page 248 139

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

260

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o No sound comes out

Symptom

Cause / Solution

No sound comes out of speakers.

0 Check the connections for all devices. 0 Insert connection cables all the way in.

0 Check that input connectors and output connectors are not reversely connected.

0 Check cables for damage.

0 Check that speaker cables are properly connected. Check that cable core wires come in contact with the metal part on speaker terminals.

0 Securely tighten the speaker terminals. Check speaker terminals for looseness.

0 Check that a proper input source is selected.

0 Adjust the volume.

0 Cancel the mute mode.

0 Check the digital audio input connector setting.

0 Check the digital audio output setting on the connected device. On some devices, the digital audio output is set to off by default.

0 When a headphone is plugged into the PHONES jack on the main unit, sound is not output from the speaker terminal and PRE OUT connector.

No sound comes out when 0 When this unit is connected to a device equipped with a DVI-D connector, no sound is output. Make a

using the DVI-D

separate audio connection.

connection.

No sound comes out of a TV that is connected via HDMI.

0 Audio signals input to 7.1CH IN connectors on this unit cannot be output to the TV.

Page 28    36
36 81 82 82 200 




Front panel

Display

Rear panel

261

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Desired sound does not come out

Symptom

Cause / Solution

The volume does not increase.

0 The maximum volume is set too low. Set the maximum volume using "Limit" on the menu.
0 Appropriate volume correction processing is performed according to the input audio format and settings, so the volume may not reach the upper limit.

No sound comes out with the HDMI connection.

0 Check the connection of the HDMI connectors.
0 When outputting HDMI audio from the speakers, set "HDMI Audio Out" on the menu to "AVR". To output from the TV, set "TV".

0 When using the HDMI control function, check that the audio output is set to the AV amplifier on the TV.

No sound comes out of a specific speaker.

0 Check that speaker cables are properly connected. 0 Check that a selection other than "None" is set for the "Speaker Config." setting in menu.

0 Check the "Assign Mode" setting in the menu.

0 When the sound mode is "Stereo" and "Virtual", audio is only output from the front speakers and subwoofer.

No sound is produced from 0 Check the subwoofer connections.

subwoofer.

0 Turn on the subwoofer's power.

0 Set "Speaker Config." - "Subwoofer" in the menu to "1 spkr" or "2 spkrs".

0 When "Speaker Config." - "Front" in the menu is set to "Large", depending on the input signal and the sound mode, no sound may be output from the subwoofer.

0 When no subwoofer audio signal (LFE) is included in the input signals, no sound may be output from the subwoofer.

0 You can make the subwoofer always output sound by setting the "Subwoofer Mode" to "LFE+Main".

DTS sound is not output. 0 Check that the digital audio output setting on the connected device is set to "DTS".

0 Set "Decode Mode" on the menu to "Auto" or "DTS".

Dolby Atmos, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD, Dolby Digital Plus audio is not output.

0 Make HDMI connections. 0 Check the digital audio output setting on the connected device. On some devices, "PCM" is set by default.

Page 179 
62 189
150  222 216 
  222 222
230
230  204 66 

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

262

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Symptom

Cause / Solution

DTS Neural:X mode cannot 0 DTS Neural:X cannot be selected when using the headphones. be selected.

Dolby Surround mode cannot be selected.

0 Dolby Surround cannot be selected when using the headphones.

Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey Dynamic EQ®, Audyssey Dynamic Volume® and Audyssey LFCTM cannot be selected.

0 These cannot be selected when you have not performed Audyssey® Setup. 0 Switch to a sound mode other than "Direct" or "Pure Direct". 0 These cannot be selected when using the headphones.

Audyssey DSX® cannot be 0 It can be selected when using the front height or front wide speakers.

selected.

0 It can be selected when using the center speaker.

0 Switch the sound mode to Dolby sound mode or DTS sound mode.

0 This cannot be selected when using the headphones.

0 This cannot be set when the input signal is a 2-channel source.

"M-DAX" cannot be selected.

0 Check that an analog signal or PCM signal (Sample Rate = 44.1/48 kHz) is input. For playback of multichannel signals such as Dolby Digital or DTS surround, "M-DAX" cannot be used.
0 Switch to a sound mode other than "Direct" or "Pure Direct".

No audio is output from PRE OUT or speakers for ZONE2.

0 In ZONE2, the audio can be played back when signals input from digital connectors (OPTICAL/ COAXIAL) are in 2ch PCM format.
0 In ZONE2, the audio can be played back when signals input from the HDMI connector are in 2ch PCM format. To play back the audio in ZONE2 irrespective of the input signal format, set "HDMI Audio" in the menu to "PCM". Depending on the played back device, the audio may not be played back even with this setting. In that case, set the audio format to "PCM (2ch)" on the played back device.

0 When listening to the audio of a Bluetooth device in ZONE2, remove any obstructions between the Bluetooth device and this unit and use it within a range of about 32.8 ft/10 m.

Page 

205 139 
224 222 138   177
139 
245


Front panel

Display

Rear panel

263

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Sound is interrupted or noise occurs

Symptom

Cause / Solution

During playback from the Internet radio or USB memory device, sound is occasionally interrupted.

0 When the transfer speed of the USB memory device is slow, sound may occasionally be interrupted. 0 The network communication speed is slow or the radio station is busy.

When making a call on iPhone, noise occurs in audio output on this unit.

0 When making a call, keep a distance of 0.7 ft/20 cm or longer between iPhone and this unit.

Noise often occurs in FM/AM broadcasting.

0 Change the antenna orientation or position. 0 Separate the AM loop antenna from the unit.

0 Use an outdoor antenna.

0 Separate the antenna from other connection cables.

The sounds appear to be distorted.

0 Lower the volume.
0 Set "Off" to the ECO Mode. When "On" or "Auto" is in the ECO Mode, the audio may by distorted when the playback volume is high.

Sound cuts out when using 0 If nearby devices cause playback to cut out due to electronic interference, switch to a wired LAN

Wi-Fi connection.

connection.

0 Particularly when you play back large music files, depending on your wireless LAN environment, the playback sound may be interrupted. In this case, make the wired LAN connection.

Page  

73  73 73 82 241
75
233

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

264

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o No video is shown on the TV

Symptom No picture appears.

0 Check the connections for all devices.

Cause / Solution

0 Insert connection cables all the way in.

0 Check that input connectors and output connectors are not reversely connected.

0 Check cables for damage.

0 Match the input settings to the input connector of the TV connected to this unit.

0 Check that the proper input source is selected.

0 Check the video input connector setting.

0 Check that the resolution of the player corresponds to that of the TV.

0 Check whether the TV is compatible with copyright protection (HDCP). If connected to a device not compatible with HDCP, video will not be output correctly.

0 To enjoy content that is copyright protected by HDCP 2.2, use a playback device and TV compatible with HDCP 2.2 only.
0 The HDMI signal cannot be converted to an analog signal. Use analog connections.

No video is shown on the TV with the DVI-D connection.

0 Use an "High Speed HDMI cable with Ethernet" or "High speed cable" that comes with the HDMI logo if you wish to playback 4K (60/50 Hz) video.
0 With the DVI-D connection, on some device combinations, devices may not function properly due to the copy guard copyright protection (HDCP).

No video from an input source such as a game console is shown on the TV.

0 When special video signals are input from a game console, etc., the video conversion function may not function. Connect the input connector to the monitor output connector of the same type.

While the menu is being displayed, no video is shown on the TV.

0 The video being played will not appear in the background of the menu when the menu is operated during playback of the following video signals. - Some images of 3D video contents - Computer resolution images (example: VGA) - Video with an aspect ratio other than 16:9 or 4:3 - 4K video

Page 62    200 81 200 251 279 
280 
279



Front panel

Display

Rear panel

265

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Symptom

Cause / Solution

When using HDMI ZONE2, 0 When ZONE2 is operated with the same input source selected for MAIN ZONE and ZONE2, video in

the video output in MAIN

MAIN ZONE may be interrupted.

ZONE is interrupted.

Page 

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

266

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o The menu screen is not displayed on the TV

Symptom

Cause / Solution

The menu screen or status 0 The menu screen is only displayed on this unit and a TV connected with an HDMI cable. If this unit is

information screen is not

connected to a TV using a different video output connector, operate while watching the display on this

displayed on the TV.

unit.

0 The status information will not appear on the TV when the following video signals are being played. - Some images of 3D video content - Computer resolution images (example: VGA) - Video with an aspect ratio other than 16:9 or 4:3

0 When a 2D video is converted to a 3D video on the TV, the menu screen or status information screen is not displayed properly.

0 In the pure direct playback mode, the menu screen or status information is not displayed. Switch to a sound mode other than the pure direct mode.

0 Set the "TV Format" setting in the menu to a selection that is appropriate for the TV.

Page 
252
252 138 199

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

267

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o iPod cannot be played back

Symptom

Cause / Solution

iPod cannot be connected. 0 When using iPod by connecting it to the USB port, some iPod variations are not supported.

The AirPlay icon ' is not displayed on iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad.

0 When iPod is connected by using a USB cable other than the genuine cable, iPod may not be recognized. Use a genuine USB cable.
0 This unit and PC / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad are not connected to the same network (LAN). Connect it to the same LAN as this unit.
0 The firmware on iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad is not compatible with AirPlay. Update the firmware to the latest version.

Audio is not output.

0 The volume on iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad is set to the minimum level. The volume on iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad is linked with the volume on this unit. Set a proper volume level.
0 The AirPlay playback is not performed, or this unit is not selected. Click the AirPlay icon ' on the iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad screen and select this unit.

Audio is interrupted during the AirPlay playback on iPhone / iPod touch / iPad.

0 Quit the application running in the background of the iPhone/iPod touch/iPad, and then play using AirPlay.
0 Some external factors may be affecting the wireless connection. Modify the network environment by taking measures such as shortening the distance from the wireless LAN access point.

iTunes cannot be played back through the remote control unit.

0 Enable the "Allow iTunes audio control from remote speakers" setting on iTunes. Then, you can perform playback, pause, and skip operations through the remote control unit.

Page 71 
75  
123   

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

268

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o USB memory devices cannot be played back

Symptom

Cause / Solution

"No connection" is displayed.

0 This unit cannot recognize the USB memory device. Disconnect and reconnect the USB memory device. 0 Mass storage class compatible USB memory devices are supported.

0 This unit does not support a connection through a USB hub. Connect the USB memory device directly to the USB port.

0 The USB memory device must be formatted to FAT16 or FAT32.

0 Not all USB memory devices are guaranteed to work. Some USB memory devices are not recognized. When using a type of portable hard disc drive compatible with the USB connection that requires power from an AC adapter, use the AC adapter that came with the drive.

Files on the USB memory device are not displayed.

0 Files of a type not supported by this unit are not displayed.
0 This unit is able to display files in a maximum of eight folder layers. A maximum of 5000 files (folders) can also be displayed for each layer. Modify the folder structure of the USB memory device.

0 When multiple partitions exist on the USB memory device, only files on the first partition are displayed.

Files on a USB memory device cannot be played.

0 Files are created in a format that is not supported by this unit. Check the formats supported by this unit.
0 You are attempting to play a file that is copyright protected. Files that are copyright protected cannot be played on this unit.

0 Playback may not be possible if the album art file size exceeds 2 MB.

Page 71  
 
88 
 282 


Front panel

Display

Rear panel

269

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o File names on the iPod/USB memory device are not displayed properly

Symptom

Cause / Solution

The file names are not displayed properly ("...", etc.).

0 Characters that cannot be displayed have been used. On this unit, characters that cannot be displayed are replaced with a ". (period)".

o Bluetooth cannot be played back

Symptom

Cause / Solution

Bluetooth devices cannot 0 The Bluetooth function in the Bluetooth device has not been enabled. See the Owner's Manual of the

be connected to this unit.

Bluetooth device to enable the Bluetooth function.

0 Bring the Bluetooth device near to this unit.

0 The Bluetooth device cannot connect with this unit if it is not compatible with the A2DP profile.

0 Turn the power of the Bluetooth device off and on again, and then try again.

The sound is cut off.

0 Bring the Bluetooth device near to this unit.

0 Remove obstructions between the Bluetooth device and this unit.

0 To prevent electromagnetic interference, locate this unit away from microwave ovens, wireless LAN devices and other Bluetooth devices.

0 Reconnect the Bluetooth device.

Page 
Page 
     


Front panel

Display

Rear panel

270

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o The Internet radio cannot be played back

Symptom

Cause / Solution

A list of broadcasting stations is not displayed.

0 The LAN cable is not properly connected, or the network is disconnected. Check the connection status. 0 Perform the network diagnostic mode.

Internet Radio cannot be 0 The selected radio station is broadcasting in a format that is not supported by this unit. Formats that can

played.

be played back in this unit are MP3, WMA and AAC.

0 The firewall function is enabled on the router. Check the firewall setting.

0 The IP address is not properly set.

0 Check the power of the router is on.

0 To obtain the IP address automatically, enable the DHCP server function on the router. Also, set the DHCP setting to "On" on this unit.

0 To obtain the IP address manually, set the IP address and proxy on this unit.

0 Some radio stations broadcast silently during some time period. In this case, no audio is output. Wait for a while and select the same radio station, or select another radio station.

Cannot connect to favorite 0 Radio station is not currently in service. Register radio stations in service. radio stations.

For some radio stations, "Connection down" is displayed and station cannot be connected to.

0 The selected radio station is not in service. Select a radio station in service.

Page 75  285
 236  236
236 105



Front panel

Display

Rear panel

271

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Music files on PC or NAS cannot be played back

Symptom

Cause / Solution

Files stored on a computer 0 Files are stored in a non-compatible format. Record in a compatible format.

cannot be played.

0 Files that are copyright protected cannot be played on this unit.

0 The set's USB port cannot be used for connection to a computer.

0 Media sharing settings are not correct. Change media sharing settings so that the unit can access the folders on your computer.

Server is not found, or it is not possible to connect to the server.

0 The computer's or router's firewall is activated. Check the computer's or router's firewall settings. 0 Computer's power is not turned on. Turn on the power. 0 Server is not running. Launch the server.

0 Set's IP address is wrong. Check the set's IP address.

Music files on PC cannot 0 Even if PC is connected to the USB port on this unit, music files on it cannot be played back. Connect PC

be played back.

to this unit through the network.

Files on PC or NAS are not 0 Files of a type not supported by this unit are not displayed. displayed.

Music stored on a NAS cannot be played.

0 If you use a NAS in conformity with the DLNA standard, enable the DLNA server function in the NAS setting.

0 If you use a NAS that does not conform with the DLNA standard, play the music via a PC. Set Windows Media Player's media sharing function and add NAS to the selected play folder.

0 If connection is restricted, set audio equipment as the connection target.

o Various online services cannot be played

Symptom

Cause / Solution

Various online services cannot be played.

0 The online service may have been discontinued.

Page 284   109
   232 75
284

109

Page 

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

272

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o The HDMI control function does not work

Symptom

Cause / Solution

The HDMI control function does not work.

0 Check that "HDMI Control" in the menu is set to "On".
0 You cannot operate devices that are not compatible with the HDMI control function. In addition, depending on the connected device or the settings, the HDMI control function may not work. In this case, operate the external device directly.

0 Check that the HDMI control function setting is enabled on all devices connected to this unit.

0 When you make connection related changes such as connecting an additional HDMI device, the link operation settings may be initialized. Turn off this unit and devices connected via HDMI, and turn them on again.

Page 189 150
150 150

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

273

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Cannot connect to a wireless LAN network

Symptom

Cause / Solution

Cannot connect to the network.

0 The network name (SSID), password and encryption setting have not been set up correctly. Configure the network settings according to the setting details of this unit.

0 Shorten the distance from the wireless LAN access point and remove any obstructions to improve access first before re-connecting again. Place the unit away from microwave ovens and other network access points.

0 Configure the access point channel settings away from channels that are being used by other networks.

0 This unit is not compatible with WEP (TSN).

Cannot connect to WPS. 0 Check that the WPS mode of the router is operating.

0 Press the WPS button on the router and then press the "Connect" button displayed on the TV within 2 minutes.

0 A router/settings that are compatible with WPS 2.0 standards are required. Set the encryption time to "None", "WPA-PSK (AES)" or WPA2-PSK (AES).

0 If the router encryption method is WEP/WPA-TKIP/WPA2-TKIP, you cannot connect by using the WPS button. In this case, use the "Scan Networks" or "Manual" method to connect.

Cannot connect to the

0 Update the iPhone/iPod touch/iPad firmware to the latest version.

network using iPhone/iPod 0 When using a USB cable to configure the settings, the iOS device firmware version needs to support iOS

touch/iPad.

5 or later. When configuring the settings via a wireless connection, iOS 7 or later needs to be supported.

Page 235

   
235

 

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

274

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o When using HDMI ZONE2, the devices does not function properly

Symptom

Cause / Solution

When using MAIN ZONE, 0 With the same input source selected for MAIN ZONE and ZONE2, when you operate MAIN ZONE, video video output is interrupted may be interrupted in HDMI ZONE2. in HDMI ZONE2.

When using HDMI ZONE2, 0 Check that the power is on for ZONE2. no video or audio is output 0 Check the input source for ZONE2. from the TV in ZONE2.
0 The AUX1-HDMI connector on the front panel does not support the HDMI ZONE2 function.

0 In ZONE2, playback is only possible when the input signals are HDMI signals.

0 When the TV does not support the input audio format, audio is not output. Set the audio format to "PCM" on the playback device. Alternatively, set "ZONE2 Setup" - "HDMI Audio" in the menu to "PCM".

0 When the TV is not compatible with the resolution of the input video, no video is output. Set the output resolution on the playback device to a resolution that is compatible with the TV.

When using HDMI ZONE2, 0 When the same input source is selected for MAIN ZONE and ZONE2, the audio format is limited

MAIN ZONE audio is

according to the specifications of the TV in ZONE2.

played back as PCM.

Page 
165 165   245



Front panel

Display

Rear panel

275

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Resetting factory settings

Perform this procedure if the display is abnormal or if operations cannot be performed. Various settings are reset to the factory default values. Make settings again.

X

M-DAX

1 Turn off the power using X. 2 Press X while simultaneously pressing M-DAX and
ZONE2 SOURCE.

3 Remove your fingers from the two buttons when "Initialized" appears on the display.

ZONE2 SOURCE
.

0 Before restoring the default setting, the "Save" function of the web control function can be used to store the various settings of the unit. (v p. 159) However, account information for network content and information on registered favorites cannot be stored.
0 When deleting a Pandora account, carry out steps 1 to 3 after signing out in the Pandora service. (v p. 118)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

276

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

About HDMI
HDMI is an abbreviation of High-Definition Multimedia Interface, which is an AV digital interface that can be connected to a TV or amplifier. With the HDMI connection, high definition video and high quality audio formats adopted by Blu-ray Disc players (Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD, DTS-HD Master Audio) can be transmitted, which is not possible with the analog video transmission. Furthermore, in the HDMI connection, audio and video signals can be transmitted through a single HDMI cable, while in conventional connections it is necessary to provide audio and video cables separately for connection between devices. This allows you to simplify the wiring configuration that tends to be quite complex in a home theater system. This unit supports the following HDMI functions.
0 Deep Color An imaging technology supported by HDMI. Unlike RGB or YCbCr, which uses 8 bits (256 shades) per color, it can use 10 bits (1024 shades), 12 bits (4096 shades), or 16 bits (65536 shades) to produce colors in higher definition. Both devices linked via HDMI must support Deep Color.
0 "x.v.Color" This function lets HDTVs display colors more accurately. It enables display with natural, vivid colors. "x.v.Color" is trademark of Sony Corporation.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

0 3D This unit supports input and output of 3D (3 dimensional) video signals of HDMI. To play back 3D video, you need a TV and player that provide support for the HDMI 3D function and a pair of 3D glasses.
0 4K This unit supports input and output of 4K (3840 x 2160 pixels) video signals of HDMI.
0 Content Type It automatically makes settings suitable for the video output type (content information).
0 Adobe RGB color, Adobe YCC601 color The color space defined by Adobe Systems Inc. Because it is a wider color space than RGB, it can produce more vivid and natural images.
0 sYCC601 color Each of these color spaces defines a palette of available colors that is larger than the traditional RGB color model.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

277

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

0 Auto Lip Sync This function can automatically correct delay between the audio and video. Use a TV that is compatible with the Auto Lip Sync function.
0 HDMI Pass Through Even when the power to this unit is set to standby, signals input from the HDMI input connector are output to a TV or other device that is connected to the HDMI output connector.
0 HDMI Control If you connect the unit and an HDMI control function compatible TV or player with an HDMI cable and then enable the HDMI control function setting on each device, the devices will be able to control each other. 0 Power off link This unit power off can be linked to the TV power off step. 0 Audio output destination switching From the TV, you can switch whether to output audio from the TV or the AV amplifier. 0 Volume adjustment You can adjust this unit's volume in the TV volume adjustment operation. 0 Input source switching You can switch this unit input sources through linkage to TV input switching. When playing the player, this unit input source switches to the source for that player.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

0 ARC (Audio Return Channel)
This function transmits audio signals from the TV to this unit through the HDMI cable and plays back the audio from the TV on this unit based on the HDMI control function.
If a TV without the ARC function is connected via HDMI connections, video signals of the playback device connected to this unit are transmitted to the TV, but this unit can not play back the audio from the TV. If you want to enjoy surround audio for TV program, a separate audio cable connection is required.
In contrast, if a TV with the ARC function is connected via HDMI connections, no audio cable connection is required. Audio signals from the TV can be input to this unit through the HDMI cable between this unit and the TV. This function allows you to enjoy surround playback on this unit for the TV.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

278

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Supported audio formats

2-channel Linear PCM Multi-channel Linear PCM
Bitstream
DSD

2-channel, 32 kHz ­ 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
7.1-channel, 32 kHz ­ 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
Dolby Digital / DTS / Dolby Atmos / Dolby TrueHD / Dolby Digital Plus / DTS:X / DTS-HD Master Audio / DTS-HD High Resolution Audio / DTS Express 2-channel ­ 5.1-channel, 2.8224 MHz

o Supported video signals

0 480i 0 576i 0 720p 60/50Hz 0 1080p 60/50/24Hz

0 480p 0 576p 0 1080i 60/50Hz 0 4K 60/50/30/25/24 Hz

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Copyright protection system
In order to play back digital video and audio such as BD video or DVD video via HDMI connection, both this unit and the TV or player must to support the copyright protection system known as HDCP (Highbandwidth Digital Content Protection System). HDCP is copyright protection technology comprised of data encryption and authentication of the connected AV devices. This unit supports HDCP.
0 If a device that does not support HDCP is connected, video and audio are not output correctly. Read the owner's manual of your television or player for more information.

0 When connecting this unit to a device that is compatible with the Deep Color, 4K and ARC functions, use a "High Speed HDMI cable with Ethernet" that bears the HDMI logo.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

279

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Video conversion function
This unit automatically converts the input video signals as shown in the diagram before outputting them to the TV.

Video device

This unit

HDMI-compatible TV

Appendix

Output

HDMI signal

Input (IN)

HDMI connector

HDMI connector

Component video signal

Component video

Component video

connectors

connectors

Video signal

Video connector

Video connector

Output (MONITOR OUT)
HDMI signal

HDMI connector

HDMI connector

HDMI-incompatible TV

Component video signal

Component video

Component video

connectors

connectors

Video signal

Video connector

Video connector

0 The main zone video conversion function is compatible with the following formats: NTSC, PAL, SECAM, NTSC4.43, PAL-N, PAL-M and PAL-60.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

280

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

This unit can convert the input video signals to the resolution that is set for "Resolution" in the menu before outputting them to the TV. (v p. 196)

Input signal HDMI
Component Video Video

Output signal
480i/576i 480p/576p
720p 1080i 1080p 24Hz 1080p 4K 30/25/24Hz 4K 60/50Hz 480i/576i 480p/576p 720p 1080i 1080p 480i/576i

480i/576i

480p/576p

.
HDMI 720p 1080i 1080p 1080p 24Hz

z The HDMI connector on the front panel supports YCbCr420 format only.

4K 30/25/24Hz

4K 60/50Hz
z

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

281

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Playing back a USB memory devices

0 This unit is compatible with MP3 ID3-Tag (Ver. 2) standard. 0 This unit can show the artwork that was embedded by using MP3 ID3-Tag Ver. 2.3 or 2.4. 0 This unit is compatible with WMA META tags. 0 If the image size (pixels) of an album artwork exceeds 500 × 500 (WMA/MP3/WAV/FLAC) or 349 × 349 (MPEG-4 AAC), then music may not be played
back properly.

o Compatible formats

WMAz1 MP3 WAV MPEG-4 AACz1
FLAC ALACz2 DSD AIFF

Sampling frequency 32/44.1/48 kHz
32/44.1/48 kHz 32/44.1/48/88.2/ 96/176.4/192 kHz
32/44.1/48 kHz
32/44.1/48/88.2/ 96/176.4/192 kHz 32/44.1/48/88.2/
96 kHz 2.8 MHz 32/44.1/48/88.2/ 96/176.4/192 kHz

Bit rate 48 ­ 192
kbps 32 ­ 320
kbps ­
16 ­ 320 kbps
­
­
­
­

Extension .wma
.mp3
.wav .aac/ .m4a/ .mp4 .flac
.m4a .dsf/ .dff .aif/ .aiff

z1 Only files that are not protected by copyright can be played on this unit. Content downloaded from pay sites on the Internet are copyright protected. Also, files encoded in WMA format when ripped from a CD, etc. on a computer may be copyright protected, depending on the computer's settings.
z2 Copyright [2012] [D&M Holdings. Inc.] Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
0 In ZONE2, it is not possible to play the DSD signal.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

282

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Maximum number of playable files and folder

The limits on the number of folders and files that can be displayed by this unit are as follows.

Item

Media

USB memory device

Memory capacity

FAT16 : 2 GB, FAT32 : 2 TB

Number of folder directory levels z1

8 levels

Number of folders

500

Number of filesz2

5000

z1 The limited number includes the root folder. z2 The allowable number of files may differ according to the USB memory device
capacity and the file size.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Playing back a Bluetooth device
This unit supports the following Bluetooth profile. 0 A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile):
When a Bluetooth device that supports this standard is connected, monaural and stereo sound data can be streamed at a high quality. 0 AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile): When a Bluetooth device that supports this standard is connected, the Bluetooth device can be operated from this unit.
o About Bluetooth communications
Radio waves broadcast from this unit may interfere with the operation of medical devices. Make sure you turn off the power of this unit and Bluetooth device in the following locations as radio wave interference may cause malfunctions. 0 Hospitals, trains, aircraft, petrol kiosks and places where flammable
gases are generated 0 Near automatic doors and fire alarms

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

283

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Playing back a file saved on a PC or NAS

0 This unit is compatible with MP3 ID3-Tag (Ver. 2) standard. 0 This unit can show the artwork that was embedded by using MP3 ID3-Tag Ver. 2.3 or 2.4. 0 This unit is compatible with WMA META tags. 0 If the image size (pixels) of an album artwork exceeds 500 × 500 (WMA/MP3/WAV/FLAC) or 349 × 349 (MPEG-4 AAC), then music may not be played
back properly. 0 A server or server software compatible with distribution in the corresponding formats is required to play music files via a network.

o Specifications of supported files

WMAz1 MP3 WAV MPEG-4 AACz1
FLAC ALACz2 DSD AIFF

Sampling frequency 32/44.1/48 kHz
32/44.1/48 kHz 32/44.1/48/88.2/ 96/176.4/192 kHz
32/44.1/48 kHz
32/44.1/48/88.2/ 96/176.4/192 kHz 32/44.1/48/88.2/
96 kHz 2.8 MHz 32/44.1/48/88.2/ 96/176.4/192 kHz

Bit rate 48 ­ 192
kbps 32 ­ 320
kbps ­
16 ­ 320 kbps
­
­
­
­

Extension .wma
.mp3
.wav .aac/ .m4a/ .mp4 .flac
.m4a .dsf/ .dff .aif/ .aiff

z1 Only files that are not protected by copyright can be played on this unit. Content downloaded from pay sites on the Internet are copyright protected. Also, files encoded in WMA format when ripped from a CD, etc. on a computer may be copyright protected, depending on the computer's settings.
z2 Copyright [2012] [D&M Holdings. Inc.] Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
0 In ZONE2, it is not possible to play the DSD signal.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

284

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Playing back Internet Radio

o Playable broadcast station specifications

WMA MP3 MPEG-4 AAC

Sampling frequency 32/44.1/48 kHz 32/44.1/48 kHz
32/44.1/48 kHz

Bit rate 48 ­ 192
kbps 32 ­ 320
kbps
16 ­ 320 kbps

Extension .wma
.mp3 .aac/ .m4a/ .mp4

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Personal memory plus function
The most recently used settings (input mode, HDMI output mode, sound mode, tone control, channel level, MultEQ® XT32, Dynamic EQ, Dynamic Volume, M-DAX and audio delay, etc.) are saved for each input source.

0 "Surround Parameter" settings are stored for each sound mode.
Last function memory
This function stores the settings which were made before going into the standby mode.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

285

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Sound modes and channel output
S This indicates the audio output channels or surround parameters that can be set. D This indicates the audio output channels. The output channels depend on the settings of "Speaker Config.". (v p. 222)

Sound mode
Direct/Pure Direct (2-channel) Direct/Pure Direct (Multi-channel) DSD Direct (2-channel) DSD Direct (Multi-channel) Stereo Multi Ch In Dolby Surround z1 DTS Neural:X z2 Audyssey DSX® Dolby Digital Dolby Digital Plus Dolby TrueHD Dolby Atmos DTS Surround DTS 96/24 DTS-HD DTS Express DTS:X Multi Ch Stereo Virtual

Front L/R
S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S

Center

Surround L/R

Surround Back L/R

Front Wide L/R

D

D

Dz3

Dz3

D

D

D

D

Dz3

D

D

Dz4

D

D

D

D

D

D

Dz6

D

D

D

D

Dz3

Dz3

D

D

Dz3

Dz3

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

Dz3

Dz3

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

Dz5

Dz5

.
Channel output

Front Height
L/R

Top Front L/R

Top Middle
L/R

Top Rear L/R

Dz3

Dz3

Dz3

Dz3

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

Dz6

Dz3

Dz3

D

D

D

D

Dz3
D Dz5

D Dz5

D Dz5

D Dz5

Rear Height
L/R Dz3
D D
D
D Dz5

Front Dolby Atmos Enabled L/R Dz3
D D
D
D Dz5

Surround Dolby Atmos Enabled L/R Dz3
D D
D
D Dz5

Back Dolby Atmos Enabled L/R Dz3
D D
D
D Dz5

Subwoofer
Dz7 D
Dz7 D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

286

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

z1 The applicable sound mode includes "Dolby Surround" and sound modes that have "+Dolby Surround" in the sound mode name. z2 The applicable sound mode includes "DTS Neural:X" and sound modes that have "+Neural:X" in the sound mode name. z3 A signal for each channel contained in an input signal is output as audio. z4 Audio is not output when "Speaker Config." - "Surr. Back" in the menu is set to "1 spkr". (v p. 223) z5 Audio is output from the speakers specified in the "Surround Parameter" ­ "Speaker Select" settings. (v p. 176) z6 Audio is output from the speakers specified in the "Audyssey DSX®" settings. (v p. 183) z7 Audio is output when "Subwoofer Mode" in the menu is set to "LFE+Main". (v p. 230)

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

287

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Sound modes and surround parameters

Tips

Appendix

Sound mode

Dialog Level Adjust

Subwoofer Level Adjust

Direct/Pure Direct (2-channel) z5

Direct/Pure Direct (Multi-channel) z5

S

DSD Direct (2-channel)

DSD Direct (Multi-channel) z5

S

Stereo

Multi Ch In

S

Dolby Surround

S

DTS Neural:X

S

Audyssey DSX®

S

Dolby Digital

S

Dolby Digital Plus

S

Dolby TrueHD

S

Dolby Atmos

S

DTS Surround

S

DTS 96/24

S

DTS-HD

S

DTS Express

S

DTS:X

S

Multi Ch Stereo

S

Virtual

S

Sz6 S
Sz6 S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S

z1 - z6 : "Sound modes and surround parameters" (v p. 290)

.
Cinema EQ

Surround Parameter

Loudness Management
z1
S
S

Dynamic Compression
z2
S
S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

Dialog Control z3

Low Frequency z4 S S S

Speaker Select

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

288

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Sound mode

Surround Parameter Center Spread DTS Neural:X

Direct/Pure Direct (2-channel) z5

Direct/Pure Direct (Multi-channel) z5

DSD Direct (2-channel)

DSD Direct (Multi-channel) z5

Stereo

Multi Ch In

Dolby Surround

S

DTS Neural:X

Audyssey DSX®

Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby TrueHD

Dolby Atmos

DTS Surround

DTS 96/24

DTS-HD

DTS Express

DTS:X

S

Multi Ch Stereo

Virtual

z5, z7 - z10: "Sound modes and surround parameters" (v p. 290)

Tone z7
S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S

.

MultEQ® XT32 Dynamic EQ

z8

z9

Audyssey
Dynamic Volume
z9

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

Audyssey LFCTM z9
S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S

Audyssey DSX®
S
S S S S S S S S

M-DAX z10
S S S
S S

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

289

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

z1 This item can be selected when a Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Atmos signal is played. z2 This item can be selected when a Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Atmos, DTS:X or DTS signal is played. z3 This item can be selected when a DTS:X signal that is compatible with the Dialog Control function is input. z4 This item can be selected when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal or DVD-Audio is played. z5 During playback in Pure Direct mode, the surround parameters are the same as in Direct mode. z6 This setting is available when "Subwoofer Mode" in the menu is set to "LFE+Main". (v p. 230) z7 This item cannot be set when "Dynamic EQ" is set to "On". (v p. 181) z8 This item cannot be set when Audyssey® Setup (Speaker Calibration) has not been performed.
z9 This item cannot be set when "MultEQ® XT32" in the menu is set to "Off". (v p. 180) z10 This item can be set when the input signal is analog, PCM 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz.

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

290

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Types of input signals, and corresponding sound modes
F This indicates the default sound mode. S This indicates the selectable sound mode.

2-channel signal

Sound mode

NOTE

DTS Surround

DTS:X MSTR / DTS:X

DTS-HD MSTR

DTS-HD HI RES

DTS ES Dscrt6.1

z2

DTS ES Mtrx6.1

z2

DTS Surround

DTS 96/24

DTS Express

DTS (-HD) + Neural:X

DTS Neural:X

Dolby Surround

Dolby Atmos z1

Dolby TrueHD

Dolby Digital+

Dolby (D+) (HD) + Dolby Surround

Dolby Digital

Dolby Surround

Analog / PCM

Dolby Digital (+/HD)

DTS (-HD)

DSD (Super Audio
CD)

S

F

S

S

F

S

PCM Multi

z1 ­ z7 : "Types of input signals, and corresponding sound modes" (v p. 293)

.
DTS:X

DTSHD

Multi-channel signal

DTS DTS ES DTS ES Express Dscrt6.1 Mtrx6.1

DTS

Dolby Atmos

Dolby TrueHD

Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby Digital (EX)

DSD (Super Audio
CD)

F

Fz3

Fz4

F

F

S

S

F

Fz5

F

S

S

S

S

S

F

Sz6

S

Sz7

F

S

F

F

S

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

291

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

2-channel signal

Sound mode
Multi Ch In Multi Ch In Multi Ch In + Dolby Surround Multi Ch In 7.1 Multi Ch In + Neural:X
Audyssey Audyssey DSX®
Direct Direct DSD Direct
Pure Direct Pure Direct DSD Pure Direct
Original sound mode Multi Ch Stereo Virtual
Stereo Stereo

NOTE

Analog / PCM

Dolby Digital (+/HD)

DTS (-HD)

DSD (Super Audio
CD)

PCM Multi

F

S

z2

Sz9

S

S

Sz8

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

F

S

S

F

S

z2, z8 ­ z10 : "Types of input signals, and corresponding sound modes" (v p. 293)

.
DTS:X
S S S S S

DTSHD
S S S S S S

Multi-channel signal

DTS DTS ES DTS ES Express Dscrt6.1 Mtrx6.1

DTS

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

Dolby Atmos

Dolby TrueHD

Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby Digital (EX)

DSD (Super Audio
CD)

F S

S

Sz10 S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

Sz10 S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

292

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

z1 This item can be selected when using any of the Surround Back, Front Wide, Front Height, Top Front, Top Middle, Top Rear, Rear Height, Front Dolby, Surround Dolby or Back Dolby speaker.
z2 This item can be selected when surround back speakers are used. z3 This item can be selected when the input signal is DTS-HD Master Audio. z4 This item can be selected when the input signal is DTS-HD Hi Resolution. z5 This item can be selected when the input signal is DTS 96/24. z6 This can be selected when the Dolby Atmos signal contains the Dolby TrueHD signal. z7 This can be selected when the Dolby Atmos signal contains the Dolby Digital Plus signal. z8 The default sound mode for the AirPlay playback is "Direct". z9 This item can be selected when the input signals contain surround back signals. z10 This can be selected when the Dolby Atmos signal contains the Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Digital Plus signal.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

293

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Explanation of terms

o Audyssey
Audyssey Dynamic EQ® Dynamic EQ solves the problem of deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased by taking into account human perception and room acoustics. Audyssey Dynamic EQ® works in tandem with Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 to provide well-balanced sound for every listener at any volume level.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion (A-DSX)
Audyssey DSX® is a new surround enhancement technology that raises the surround effect and impression to realize a larger surround space by adding a new channel to the existing 5.1 channel system.
In research on human hearing characteristics, two points can be broadly cited as elements that enhance the surround effect. The most important point is the creation of horizontal spread (wide channel) at the front (forward) area in composing a realistic surround space. The next important point is the creation of vertical spread (height channel) in the front (forward) area using recognizable (audible) acoustic signals so as to create a surround space with depth.
Audyssey DSX® then creates a pair of Height channels to reproduce the next most important acoustical and perceptual cues. In addition, Audyssey DSX® does not simply add a channel but combines the existing front, surround and rear surround sound to develop a technology known as "Surround Envelopment Processing" which has been incorporated into Audyssey DSX® to further enhance the effect.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

294

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Audyssey Dynamic Volume®
Dynamic Volume solves the problem of large variations in volume level between television programs, commercials, and between the soft and loud passages of movies. Audyssey Dynamic EQ® is integrated into Dynamic Volume so that as the playback volume is adjusted automatically, the perceived bass response, tonal balance, surround impression, and dialog clarity remain the same.
Audyssey LFCTM (Low Frequency Containment)
Audyssey LFCTM solves the problem of low frequency sounds disturbing people in neighboring rooms or apartments. Audyssey LFCTM dynamically monitors the audio content and removes the low frequencies that pass through walls, floors and ceilings. It then applies psychoacoustic processing to restore the perception of low bass for listeners in the room. The result is great sound that no longer disturbs the neighbors.
Audyssey MultEQ® XT32
Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 is a room equalization solution that calibrates any audio system so that it can achieve optimum performance for every listener in a large listening area. Based on several room measurements, MultEQ® XT32 calculates an equalization solution that corrects for both time and frequency response problems in the listening area and also performs a fully automated surround system setup.

o Dolby
Dolby Atmos
Introduced first in the cinema, Dolby Atmos brings a revolutionary sense of dimension and immersion to the Home Theater experience. Dolby Atmos is an adaptable and scalable object based format that reproduces audio as independent sounds (or objects) that can be accurately positioned and move dynamically throughout the 3 dimensional listening space during playback. A key ingredient of Dolby Atmos is the introduction of a height plane of sound above the listener.
Dolby Atmos Stream
Dolby Atmos content will be delivered to your Dolby Atmos enabled AV receiver via Dolby Digital Plus or Dolby TrueHD on Blu-ray Disc, downloadable files and streaming media. A Dolby Atmos stream contains special metadata that describes the positioning of sounds within the room. This object audio data is decoded by a Dolby Atmos AV receiver and scaled for optimum playback through Home Theater speaker systems of every size and configuration.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

295

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a multi-channel digital signal format developed by Dolby Laboratories. A total of 5.1-channels are played: 3 front channels ("FL", "FR" and "C"), 2 surround channels ("SL" and "SR") and the "LFE" channel for low frequency effects. Because of this, there is no crosstalk between channels and a realistic sound field with a "three-dimensional" feeling (sense of distance, movement and positioning) is achieved. This delivers a thrilling surround sound experience in the home.
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is an improved Dolby Digital signal format that is compatible with up to 7.1-channels of discrete digital sound and also improves sound quality thanks to extra data bit rate performance. It is upwardly compatible with conventional Dolby Digital, so it offers greater flexibility in response to the source signal and the conditions of the playback device.
Dolby Surround
Dolby surround is a next generation surround technology that intelligently up mixes stereo; 5.1 and 7.1 content for playback through your surround speaker system. Dolby surround is compatible with traditional speaker layouts, as well as Dolby Atmos enabled playback systems that employ inceiling speakers or products with Dolby speaker technology.

Dolby Speaker Technology (Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers)
A convenient alternative to speakers built into the ceiling, Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers employ the ceiling above you as a reflective surface for reproducing audio in the height plane above the listener. These speakers feature a unique upward firing driver and special signal processing. These features can be built into a conventional speaker or standalone speaker module. The features minimally impact the overall speaker footprint while providing an immersive listening experience during Dolby Atmos and Dolby surround playback.
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is a high definition audio technology developed by Dolby Laboratories, using lossless coding technology to faithfully reproduce the sound of the studio master. This format provides the facility to support up to 8 audio channels with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz/24 bit resolution and up to 6 audio channels with a sampling frequency of 192 kHz/24 bit resolution.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

296

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o DTS
Dialog Control Gives you control of the listening experience. You can lift the dialog out from the background sounds when clarity and intelligibility are desired. This requires that content has been authored to support Dialog Control.
DTS This is an abbreviation of Digital Theater System, which is a digital audio system developed by DTS. DTS delivers a powerful and dynamic surround sound experience, and is found in the world's finest movie theaters and screening rooms.
DTS 96/24 DTS 96/24 is a digital audio format enabling high sound quality playback in 5.1-channels with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz and 24 bit quantization on DVD-Video.
DTS Digital Surround DTSTM Digital Surround is the standard digital surround format of DTS, Inc., compatible with a sampling frequency of 44.1 or 48 kHz and up to 5.1-channels of digital discrete surround sound.

DTS-ESTM Discrete 6.1
DTS-ESTM Discrete 6.1 is a 6.1-channel discrete digital audio format adding a surround back (SB) channel to the DTS digital surround sound. Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel audio signals is also possible according to the decoder.
DTS-ESTM Matrix 6.1
DTS-ESTM Matrix 6.1 is a 6.1-channel audio format that inserts a surround back (SB) channel to the DTS digital surround sound through matrix encoding. Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel audio signals is also possible according to the decoder.
DTS Express
DTS Express is an audio format supporting low bit rates (max. 5.1channels, 24 to 256 kbps).
DTS-HD
This audio technology provides higher sound quality and enhanced functionality than the conventional DTS and is adopted as an optional audio for Blu-ray Disc. This technology supports multi-channel, high data transfer speed, high sampling frequency, and lossless audio playback. Maximum 7.1-channels are supported in Blu-ray Disc.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

297

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is an improved version of the conventional DTS, DTS-ES and DTS 96/24 signals formats, compatible with sampling frequencies of 96 or 48 kHz and up to 7.1-channels of discrete digital sound. High data bit rate performance provides high quality sound. This format is fully compatible with conventional products, including conventional DTS digital surround 5.1-channel data.
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is a lossless audio format created by Digital Theater System (DTS). This format provides the facility to support up to 8 audio channels with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz/24 bit resolution and up to 6 audio channels with a sampling frequency of 192 kHz/24 bit resolution. It is fully compatible with conventional products, including conventional DTS digital surround 5.1-channel data.
DTS:X
DTS:X produces a hemisphere of audio, where flyovers as well as ambient backgrounds become truly enveloping. DTS:X objects enable audio to move smoothly from one speaker to any other creating life-like realism.
DTS Neural:X
Enables an immersive audio experience for older content. DTS Neural:X can upmix your stereo, 5.1 or 7.1 content to take full advantage of all speakers in your surround sound system.

o Audio
ALAC (Apple Lossless Audio Codec)
This is a codec for lossless audio compression method developed by Apple Inc. This codec can be played back on iTunes, iPod or iPhone. Data compressed to approximately 60 ­ 70 % can be decompressed to exactly the same original data.
FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec)
FLAC stands for Free lossless Audio Codec, and is a lossless free audio file format. Lossless means that the audio is compressed without any loss in quality. The FLAC license is as shown below. Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Josh Coalson Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 0 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 0 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 0 Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

298

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
LFE
This is an abbreviation of Low Frequency Effect, which is an output channel that emphasizes low frequency effect sound. Surround audio is intensified by outputting 20 Hz to 120 Hz deep bass to the system subwoofer(s).
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer-3)
This is an internationally standardized audio data compression scheme, using the "MPEG-1" video compression standard. It compresses the data volume to about one eleventh its original size while maintaining sound quality equivalent to a music CD.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

MPEG (Moving Picture Experts Group), MPEG-2, MPEG-4
These are the names for digital compression format standards used for the encoding of video and audio. Video standards include "MPEG-1 Video", "MPEG-2 Video", "MPEG-4 Visual", "MPEG-4 AVC". Audio standards include "MPEG-1 Audio", "MPEG-2 Audio", "MPEG-4 AAC".
WMA (Windows Media Audio)
This is audio compression technology developed by Microsoft Corporation. WMA data can be encoded using Windows Media® Player. To encode WMA files, only use applications authorized by Microsoft Corporation. If you use an unauthorized application, the file may not work properly.
Sampling frequency
Sampling involves taking a reading of a sound wave (analog signal) at regular intervals and expressing the height of the wave at each reading in digitized format (producing a digital signal). The number of readings taken in one second is called the "sampling frequency". The larger the value, the closer the reproduced sound is to the original.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

299

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Speaker impedance This is an AC resistance value, indicated in  (ohms). Greater power can be obtained when this value is smaller.
Dialog normalization function This function operates automatically during playback of Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Atmos, DTS or DTS-HD sources. It automatically corrects the standard signal level for individual program sources.
Dynamic range The difference between the maximum undistorted sound level and the minimum discernible level above the noise emitted by the device.
Downmix This function converts the number of channels of surround audio to a lower number of channels and plays back according to the system's configuration.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Video
ISF ISF (Imaging Science Foundation) is an organization that certifies video technicians who are then qualified to carry out calibration and adjustment to match the installation conditions. It also sets quality standards for the optimization of device video performance.
Progressive (sequential scanning) This is a scanning system of the video signal that displays 1 frame of video as one image. Compared to the interlace system, this system provides images with less flickering and jagged edges.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

300

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Network
AirPlay AirPlay sends (plays) contents recorded in iTunes or on an iPhone/iPod touch/iPad to a compatible device via the network.
DLNA DLNA and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks and/or service marks of Digital Living Network Alliance. Some contents may not be compatible with other DLNA CERTIFIED® products.
vTuner This is a free online content server for Internet Radio. For inquiries about this service, visit the vTuner site below. vTuner website: http://www.radiomarantz.com This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Nothing Else Matters Software and BridgeCo. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Nothing Else Matters Software and BridgeCo or an authorized subsidiary.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

WEP Key (network key) This is key information used for encrypting data when conducting data transfer. On this unit, the same WEP key is used for data encryption and decryption, so the same WEP key must be set on both devices in order for communications to be established between them.
Wi-Fi® Wi-Fi Certification assures tested and proven interoperability by the Wi-Fi Alliance, a group certifying interoperability among wireless LAN devices.
WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access) This is a security standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance. In addition to the conventional SSID (network name) and WEP key (network key), it also uses a user identification function and encrypting protocol for stronger security.
WPA2 (Wi-Fi Protected Access 2) This is a new version of the WPA established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, compatible with more secure AES encryption.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

301

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK (Pre-shared Key)
This is a simple authentication system for mutual authentication when a preset character string matches on the wireless LAN access point and client.
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)
This is a standard drawn up by the Wi-Fi Alliance to ease the task of setting up wireless LAN connections and configuring security.
Network Names (SSID: Service Set Identifier)
When forming wireless LAN networks, groups are formed to prevent interference, data theft, etc. These groups are based on "SSID (network names)". For enhanced security, a WEP key is set so that communication is unavailable unless both the "SSID" and the WEP key match. This is suitable for constructing a simplified network.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Others
HDCP When transmitting digital signals between devices, this copyright protection technology encrypts the signals to prevent content from being copied without authorization.
MAIN ZONE The room where this unit is placed is called the MAIN ZONE.
Pairing Pairing (registration) is an operation that is required in order to connect a Bluetooth device to this unit using Bluetooth. When paired, the devices authenticate each other and can connect without mistaken connections occurring. When using Bluetooth connection for the first time, you need to pair this unit and the Bluetooth device to be connected.
Protection circuit This is a function to prevent damage to devices within the power supply when an abnormality such as an overload, excess voltage occurs or over temperature for any reason.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

302

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Trademark information

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

.
"Made for iPod" and "Made for iPhone" mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, or iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, or iPhone, may affect wireless performance. AirPlay, iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, iPod shuffle and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
0 Individual users are permitted to use iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, iPod shuffle, and iPod touch for private copy and playback of non-copyrighted contents and contents whose copy and playback is permitted by law. Copyright infringement is prohibited by law.

. Manufactured under license from Audyssey LaboratoriesTM. U.S. and foreign patents pending. Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey Dynamic EQ®, Audyssey Dynamic Volume®, Audyssey DSX® and Audyssey LFCTM are registered trademarks of Audyssey Laboratories.
.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by D&M Holdings Inc. is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Atmos, Dolby Audio, Dolby Digital Plus, Pro Logic, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

303

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

.
For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS, Inc. DTS, the Symbol, DTS in combination with the Symbol, DTS:X, and the DTSX logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of DTS, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
.
The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries. This item incorporates copy protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights of Rovi Corporation. Reverse engineering and disassembly are prohibited.

.
The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo is a registered trademark of the Wi-Fi Alliance. Wi-Fi Certification provides assurance that the device has passed the interoperability test conducted by the Wi-Fi Alliance, a group that certifies interoperability among wireless LAN devices.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

304

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Specifications
o Audio section
0 Power amplifier Rated output:
Output connectors:

Front: 110 W + 110 W (8 /ohms, 20 Hz ­ 20 kHz with 0.08 % T.H.D.) 150 W + 150 W (6 /ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.) Center: 110 W (8 /ohms, 20 Hz ­ 20 kHz with 0.08% T.H.D.) 150 W (6 /ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.) Surround: 110 W + 110 W (8 /ohms, 20 Hz ­ 20 kHz with 0.08 % T.H.D.) 150 W + 150 W (6 /ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.) Surround back / Front wide / Height1: 110 W + 110 W (8 /ohms, 20 Hz ­ 20 kHz with 0.08 % T.H.D.) 150 W + 150 W (6 /ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.) 4 ­ 16 /ohms

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

305

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

0 Analog Input sensitivity/Input impedance: Frequency response: S/N: Distortion: Rated output:
0 Digital D/A output:
Digital input: 0 Phono equalizer
Input sensitivity: RIAA deviation: S/N: Distortion factor:

200 mV/47 k/kohms 10 Hz ­ 100 kHz -- +1, ­3 dB (Direct mode) 100 dB (IHF­A weighted, Direct mode) 0.005 % (20 Hz ­ 20 kHz) (Direct mode) 1.2 V
Rated output -- 2 V (at 0 dB playback) Total harmonic distortion -- 0.008 % (1 kHz, at 0 dB) S/N ratio -- 102 dB Dynamic range -- 100 dB Format -- Digital audio interface
2.5 mV ±1 dB (20 Hz to 20 kHz) 74 dB (IHF-A) 0.03 % (1 kHz, 3 V)

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

306

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

o Video section
0 Standard video connectors Input/output level and impedance: Frequency response:
0 Color component video connector Input/output level and impedance:
Frequency response:
o Tuner section
Reception frequency range: Effective sensitivity: 50 dB sensitivity: S/N ratio:
Distortion:

1 Vp-p, 75 /ohms 5 Hz ­ 10 MHz -- 0, ­3 dB
Y signal -- 1 Vp-p, 75 /ohms PB / CB signal -- 0.7 Vp-p, 75 /ohms PR / CR signal -- 0.7 Vp-p, 75 /ohms 5 Hz ­ 60 MHz -- 0, ­3 dB
[FM]
(Note: V at 75 /ohms, 0 dBf = 1 x 10 ­15 W) 87.5 MHz ­ 107.9 MHz 1.2 V (12.8 dBf) MONO  2.8 V (20.2 dBf) MONO  70 dB (IHF­A weighted, Direct mode) STEREO  67 dB (IHF­A weighted, Direct mode) MONO  0.7 % (1 kHz) STEREO  1.0 % (1 kHz)

Tips
[AM] 520 kHz ­ 1710 kHz 18 V

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

307

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

o Wireless LAN section

Network type (wireless LAN standard):
Security:
Radio frequency: No. of channels:

Conforming to IEEE 802.11b Conforming to IEEE 802.11g Conforming to IEEE 802.11n (Wi-Fi® compliant)z1
WEP 64 bit, WEP 128 bit
WPA/WPA2-PSK (AES)
WPA/WPA2-PSK (TKIP)
2.4 GHz
1 ­ 11 ch

z1 The Wi-Fi® CERTIFIED Logo and the Wi-Fi CERTIFIED On-Product Logo are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

308

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Bluetooth section

Communications system: Transmission power: Maximum communication range: Frequency band: Modulation scheme: Supported profiles:
Corresponding codec: Transmission range (A2DP):

Bluetooth Version 2.1 + EDR (Enhanced Data Rate) Maximum 2.5 mW (Class 2) Approx. 32.8 ft/10 m in line of sightz2 2.4 GHz band FHSS (Frequency-Hopping Spread Spectrum) A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) 1.2 AVRCP (Audio Video Remote Control Profile) 1.4 SBC, AAC 20 Hz - 20,000 Hz

z2 The actual communication range varies depending on the influence of such factors as obstructions between devices, electromagnetic waves from microwave ovens, static electricity, cordless phones, reception sensitivity, antenna performance, operating system, application software etc.
o General

Power supply:

AC 120 V, 60 Hz

Power consumption:

650 W

Power consumption in standby mode: 0.2 W

Power consumption in CEC standby mode:

0.5 W

Power consumption in network standby

mode:

2.7 W

For purposes of improvement, specifications and design are subject to change without notice.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

309

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

o Dimensions (Unit : in. (mm))

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

(22)

1 7/8 7/8

1 3/8 (32)

(47)

9 7/8 (248) 15 3/8 (388)

13 3/4 (349) 15 3/4 (398)

(53)

2 1/8

(18)

3/4

3/4 (18)

17 3/8 (440)

9 1/8 (229)

6 3/8 (161)

5 7/8 (147)

5/8 (14)

. 2 (50) o Weight: 25 lbs 9 oz (11.6 kg)

13 1/2 (340)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

2 1/4 (55)

2 (50)

310

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Index
v Numerics 3D ................................................................ 277 4K ................................................................ 277 5.1-channel .............................................. 33, 42 7.1-channel .............................................. 32, 43 9.1-channel .............................................. 32, 48
v A AirPlay .......................................................... 122 All Zone Stereo ............................................ 136 Audio formats ....................... 279, 282, 284, 285 Audio settings ....................................... 167, 173 Audyssey Dynamic EQ® ............................. 294 Audyssey Dynamic Volume® ...................... 295 Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 ............................ 295 Audyssey settings ................................ 180, 207 Audyssey® Setup ........................................ 205 Auto sound mode ......................................... 144 Auto Standby ............................................... 243

v B Bi-amp ............................................................ 56 Bluetooth device ............................................ 92 Blu-ray Disc player ................................... 67, 82
v C Cable TV ........................................................ 66
v D Direct sound mode ....................................... 145 Display ........................................................... 18 DLNA ........................................................... 301 Dolby Atmos ................................................. 295 Dolby sound mode ............................... 141, 296 DTS sound mode ................................. 142, 297 DVD player ............................................... 67, 82
v E ECO Mode ................................................... 241 External control device ................................... 77

v F Favorites .............................................. 128, 129 Firmware Update .......................................... 249 FM/AM antenna ........................................ 73, 97 Front panel ..................................................... 14
v G Game console ................................................ 68 General settings ................................... 169, 241
v H HDCP ........................................................... 279 HDMI Control ....................................... 150, 189

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

311

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

v I Input Assign ................................................. 200 Input settings ........................................ 168, 200 Input signal ................................................... 291 Input source ................................................... 81 Inputting characters ...................................... 171 Internet Radio ............................................... 104 iPod .......................................................... 71, 83 iPod Browse Mode ......................................... 85
v J JPEG ...................................................... 88, 108
v L Listening position ......................................... 205
v M M-DAX ......................................................... 177 Menu map .................................................... 167 Muting ............................................................ 82

v N NAS ............................................................. 108 Network settings .......................................... 232
v O Original sound mode .................................... 144
v P Pairing ...................................................... 92, 94 Pandora® .................................................... 112 PC ................................................................ 108 PCM multi-channel sound mode .................. 143 Protection circuit .......................................... 302 Pure direct .................................................... 139
v R Random playback .................................. 87, 127 Rear panel ...................................................... 20 Remote control unit ........................................ 24 Repeat playback .................................... 87, 127 Resetting factory settings ............................. 276

v S Satellite tuner ................................................. 66 Set-top box ..................................................... 66 Setup Assistant ............................................ 169 SiriusXM ....................................................... 119 Sleep timer ................................................... 153 Slideshow .................................................... 130 Smart select ......................................... 155, 155 Sound mode ................................. 138, 286, 288 Speaker connection ....................................... 28 Speaker settings .................................. 168, 205 Spotify .......................................................... 125 Stereo sound mode ...................................... 145

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

312

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

v T Text Search .................................................. 129 Tips .............................................................. 256 Troubleshooting ........................................... 258 TV ....................................................... 62, 63, 64

v U USB memory device ................................ 71, 88
v V Video camcorder ............................................ 68 Video Conversion ................................. 195, 280 Video Select ................................................. 134 Video settings ....................................... 167, 186 Volume ................................................... 82, 132

v W Web control .................................................. 158 Wi-Fi settings ............................................... 233 Wired LAN .............................................. 75, 233
v Z ZONE2 ................................................... 59, 163

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

313

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

License
This section describes software license used for this unit. To maintain the correct content, the original (English) is used.
o Boost
http://www.boost.org/
Boost Software License ­ Version 1.0 ­ August 17th, 2003
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person or organization obtaining a copy of the software and accompanying documentation covered by this license (the "Software") to use, reproduce, display, distribute, execute, and transmit the Software, and to prepare derivative works of the Software, and to permit third-parties to whom the Software is furnished to do so, all subject to the following:
The copyright notices in the Software and this entire statement, including the above license grant, this restriction and the following disclaimer, must be included in all copies of the Software, in whole or in part, and all derivative works of the Software, unless such copies or derivative works are solely in the form of machine-executable object code generated by a source language processor.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR ANYONE DISTRIBUTING THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
o Expat
http://www.jclark.com/xml/expat.html
Expat License. Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
o FastDelegate
http://www.codeproject.com/KB/cpp/FastDelegate.aspx
THE WORK (AS DEFINED BELOW) IS PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF THIS CODE PROJECT OPEN LICENSE ("LICENSE"). THE WORK IS PROTECTED BY COPYRIGHT AND/OR OTHER APPLICABLE LAW. ANY USE OF THE WORK OTHER THAN AS AUTHORIZED UNDER THIS LICENSE OR COPYRIGHT LAW IS PROHIBITED.
BY EXERCISING ANY RIGHTS TO THE WORK PROVIDED HEREIN, YOU ACCEPT AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE. THE AUTHOR GRANTS YOU THE RIGHTS CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONSIDERATION OF YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF SUCH TERMS AND CONDITIONS. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO ACCEPT AND BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE, YOU CANNOT MAKE ANY USE OF THE WORK.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

314

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Definitions. "Articles" means, collectively, all articles written by Author which describes how the Source Code and Executable Files for the Work may be used by a user.
"Author" means the individual or entity that offers the Work under the terms of this License.
"Derivative Work" means a work based upon the Work or upon the Work and other pre-existing works.
"Executable Files" refer to the executables, binary files, configuration and any required data files included in the Work.
"Publisher" means the provider of the website, magazine, CD-ROM, DVD or other medium from or by which the Work is obtained by You.
"Source Code" refers to the collection of source code and configuration files used to create the Executable Files.
"Standard Version" refers to such a Work if it has not been modified, or has been modified in accordance with the consent of the Author, such consent being in the full discretion of the Author.
"Work" refers to the collection of files distributed by the Publisher, including the Source Code, Executable Files, binaries, data files, documentation, whitepapers and the Articles.
"You" is you, an individual or entity wishing to use the Work and exercise your rights under this License.
Fair Use/Fair Use Rights. Nothing in this License is intended to reduce, limit, or restrict any rights arising from fair use, fair dealing, first sale or other limitations on the exclusive rights of the copyright owner under copyright law or other applicable laws.
License Grant. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, the Author hereby grants You a worldwide, royalty-free, non-exclusive, perpetual (for the duration of the applicable copyright) license to exercise the rights in the Work as stated below: You may use the standard version of the Source Code or Executable Files in Your own applications.
You may apply bug fixes, portability fixes and other modifications obtained from the Public Domain or from the Author. A Work modified in such a way shall still be considered the standard version and will be subject to this License.

You may otherwise modify Your copy of this Work (excluding the Articles) in any way to create a Derivative Work, provided that You insert a prominent notice in each changed file stating how, when and where You changed that file.
You may distribute the standard version of the Executable Files and Source Code or Derivative Work in aggregate with other (possibly commercial) programs as part of a larger (possibly commercial) software distribution.
The Articles discussing the Work published in any form by the author may not be distributed or republished without the Author's consent. The author retains copyright to any such Articles. You may use the Executable Files and Source Code pursuant to this License but you may not repost or republish or otherwise distribute or make available the Articles, without the prior written consent of the Author.
Any subroutines or modules supplied by You and linked into the Source Code or Executable Files this Work shall not be considered part of this Work and will not be subject to the terms of this License.
Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Author hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated in this section) patent license to make, have made, use, import, and otherwise transfer the Work.
Restrictions. The license granted in Section 3 above is expressly made subject to and limited by the following restrictions: You agree not to remove any of the original copyright, patent, trademark, and attribution notices and associated disclaimers that may appear in the Source Code or Executable Files.
You agree not to advertise or in any way imply that this Work is a product of Your own.
The name of the Author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from the Work without the prior written consent of the Author.
You agree not to sell, lease, or rent any part of the Work. This does not restrict you from including the Work or any part of the Work inside a larger software distribution that itself is being sold. The Work by itself, though, cannot be sold, leased or rented.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

315

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

You may distribute the Executable Files and Source Code only under the terms of this License, and You must include a copy of, or the Uniform Resource Identifier for, this License with every copy of the Executable Files or Source Code You distribute and ensure that anyone receiving such Executable Files and Source Code agrees that the terms of this License apply to such Executable Files and/or Source Code. You may not offer or impose any terms on the Work that alter or restrict the terms of this License or the recipients' exercise of the rights granted hereunder. You may not sublicense the Work. You must keep intact all notices that refer to this License and to the disclaimer of warranties. You may not distribute the Executable Files or Source Code with any technological measures that control access or use of the Work in a manner inconsistent with the terms of this License.
You agree not to use the Work for illegal, immoral or improper purposes, or on pages containing illegal, immoral or improper material. The Work is subject to applicable export laws. You agree to comply with all such laws and regulations that may apply to the Work after Your receipt of the Work.
Representations, Warranties and Disclaimer. THIS WORK IS PROVIDED "AS IS", "WHERE IS" AND "AS AVAILABLE", WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OR GUARANTEES. YOU, THE USER, ASSUME ALL RISK IN ITS USE, INCLUDING COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT, PATENT INFRINGEMENT, SUITABILITY, ETC. AUTHOR EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, MERCHANTABLE QUALITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR ANY WARRANTY OF TITLE OR NONINFRINGEMENT, OR THAT THE WORK (OR ANY PORTION THEREOF) IS CORRECT, USEFUL, BUG-FREE OR FREE OF VIRUSES. YOU MUST PASS THIS DISCLAIMER ON WHENEVER YOU DISTRIBUTE THE WORK OR DERIVATIVE WORKS.
Indemnity. You agree to defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Author and the Publisher from and against any claims, suits, losses, damages, liabilities, costs, and expenses (including reasonable legal or attorneys' fees) resulting from or relating to any use of the Work by You.
Limitation on Liability. EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL THE AUTHOR OR THE PUBLISHER BE LIABLE TO YOU ON ANY LEGAL THEORY FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THIS LICENSE OR THE USE OF THE WORK OR OTHERWISE, EVEN IF THE AUTHOR OR THE PUBLISHER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Termination.

This License and the rights granted hereunder will terminate automatically upon any breach by You of any term of this License. Individuals or entities who have received Derivative Works from You under this License, however, will not have their licenses terminated provided such individuals or entities remain in full compliance with those licenses. Sections 1, 2, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 and 11 will survive any termination of this License.
If You bring a copyright, trademark, patent or any other infringement claim against any contributor over infringements You claim are made by the Work, your License from such contributor to the Work ends automatically.
Subject to the above terms and conditions, this License is perpetual (for the duration of the applicable copyright in the Work). Notwithstanding the above, the Author reserves the right to release the Work under different license terms or to stop distributing the Work at any time; provided, however that any such election will not serve to withdraw this License (or any other license that has been, or is required to be, granted under the terms of this License), and this License will continue in full force and effect unless terminated as stated above.
Publisher. The parties hereby confirm that the Publisher shall not, under any circumstances, be responsible for and shall not have any liability in respect of the subject matter of this License. The Publisher makes no warranty whatsoever in connection with the Work and shall not be liable to You or any party on any legal theory for any damages whatsoever, including without limitation any general, special, incidental or consequential damages arising in connection to this license. The Publisher reserves the right to cease making the Work available to You at any time without notice
Miscellaneous
This License shall be governed by the laws of the location of the head office of the Author or if the Author is an individual, the laws of location of the principal place of residence of the Author.
If any provision of this License is invalid or unenforceable under applicable law, it shall not affect the validity or enforceability of the remainder of the terms of this License, and without further action by the parties to this License, such provision shall be reformed to the minimum extent necessary to make such provision valid and enforceable.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

316

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

No term or provision of this License shall be deemed waived and no breach consented to unless such waiver or consent shall be in writing and signed by the party to be charged with such waiver or consent.
This License constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with respect to the Work licensed herein. There are no understandings, agreements or representations with respect to the Work not specified herein. The Author shall not be bound by any additional provisions that may appear in any communication from You. This License may not be modified without the mutual written agreement of the Author and You
o libogg
http://www.xiph.org/ogg/
Copyright (c) 2002, Xiph.org Foundation
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
0 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
0 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
0 Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o libvorbis
http://www.xiph.org/vorbis/
Copyright (c) 2002-2004 Xiph.org Foundation
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
0 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
0 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
0 Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
o Tremolo
http://wss.co.uk/pinknoise/tremolo
Copyright (C) 2002 ­ 2009 Xiph.org Foundation Changes Copyright (C) 2009 ­ 2010 Robin Watts for Pinknoise Productions Ltd
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

317

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

0 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
0 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
0 Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
o Tremor
http://wiki.xiph.org/index.php/Tremor
Copyright (c) 2002, Xiph.org Foundation
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
0 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
0 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
0 Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
o Mersenne Twister
http://www.math.sci.hiroshima-u.ac.jp/~m-mat/MT/MT2002/CODES/mt19937ar.c
Copyright (C) 1997 ­ 2002, Makoto Matsumoto and Takuji Nishimura, All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. The names of its contributors may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

318

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
o zlib
http://www.zlib.net/
zlib.h -- interface of the "zlib" general purpose compression library version 1.2.3, July 18th, 2005
Copyright (C) 1995 ­ 2004 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler
This software is provided "as-is", without any express or implied warranty. In no event will the authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software.
Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following restrictions:
The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote the original software. If you use this software in a product, an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not required. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be misrepresented as being the original software. This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution.
Jean-loup Gailly jloup@gzip.org, Mark Adler madler@alumni.caltech.edu

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o cURL
http://curl.haxx.se
COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE
Copyright (c) 1996 ­ 2011, Daniel Stenberg, <daniel@haxx.se>.
All rights reserved.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization of the copyright holder.
o c-ares
http://c-ares.haxx.se
Copyright 1998 by the Massachusetts Institute of Technology.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation, and that the name of M.I.T. not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific, written prior permission. M.I.T. makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

319

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o License information for the software used in the unit
About GPL (GNU-General Public License), LGPL (GNU Lesser General Public License) License
This product uses GPL/LGPL software and software made by other companies. After you purchase this product, you may procure, modify or distribute the source code of the GPL/LGPL software that is used in the product. Marantz provides the source code based on the GPL and LPGL licenses at the actual cost upon your request to our customer service center. However, note that we make no guarantees concerning the source code. Please also understand that we do not offer support for the contents of the source code.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

320

Remote

Index

.

321

3520 10408 00AM Copyright © 2015 D&M Holdings Inc. All Rights Reserved.


Sanwa iTREX Workbench Antenna House PDF Output Library 2.6.0 (Windows (x64))